Home

Preframe

1. SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 A 19 0 000 DELTAY DINATE SYSTEM OF THE ORIGIN OF THE PILEGROUP 0 000 DELTAZ C COS11 COS33 ALTERNATIVE TO ALPHA BETA DIRECTION COSINES OF THE COORDINATE C SYSTEM OF THE PILEGROUP IN THE SUPERSTRUCTURE COORDINATE SYSTEM FIRST COLUMN IS THE DIR COSINES OF THE X AXIS A S O C COS11 COS12 cos13 0 0 0 0 0 0 C cos21 COS22 COS23 0 0 0 0 0 0 Cc COS31 COS32 COS33 0 0 0 0 0 0 KKK KR KKK KKK KKK PTLE SOIL PILE INTERACTION AND PILE SCOUR SECTION 0 INTER INDLIN INTERACTION CODE 0 NO 1 DIF PILES 2 FULL 1 AVAIL 0 000 DISTIN AXIMUM INTERACTION DISTANCE PILE1 PILE2 Z SCOUR VALUES ARE READ UNTIL PILE2 NPH 1 4 5 50 KKK KR KKK ARA KKK POINT FORCES SECTION 0 IFRC NUMBER OF GIVEN POINT FORCE FORCE X COORD Y COORD Z COORD X FORC n Ll Y FORCE Z FORC T E CJ KKKKKK KKK KKK KKK TOAD APPLICATION SECTION 0 20 0 0 9 81 ACCX ACCY ACCZ GRAVITY LOADING IN X Y AND Z DIR VECTOR NUMINC KEEP VECMLT SOLMLT FRCMLT 1 1 0 1 0 cm 1 0 VECTOR INCR MAXIT IPRT2 IPRT3 NPTRC QTOT CONV MISC 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 20 0011 0111 1 1 0 001 1000 0 0
2. VECTOR LOAD VECTOR NUMBER 1 2 3 NUMVEC NUMINC NUMBER OF LOAD INCREMENTS FOR EACH VECTOR KEEP START CONDITION 0 ZERO 1 RESULTING CONDITION AFTER LAST VECTOR VECMLT LOAD VECTOR MULTIPLIER FOR LOAD VALUES READ FROM FILE NF9 SOLMLT SOIL DISPL MULTIPLIER FOR VALUES READ FROM FILES NF10 AND NF7 FRCMLT POINT FORCE MULTIPLIER FOR POINT FORCES GIVEN ABOVE VECTOR LOAD VECTOR NUMBER 1 2 3 NUMVEC INCR LOAD INCREMENT NUMBER FOR PRESENT VECTOR 1 2 3 NUMINC MAXIT MAXIMUM NUMBER OF ITERATIONS IPRT2 PRINT CODE IJKL L RES DSP K RES FRC J INC DSP I INC FRC IPRT3 PRINT CODE IJKL L MATRIX K PIL RES J SUMMARY I NF15 SAVING A K 2 GIVES LIMITED PILE OUTPUT WITH DEPTH I 1 SAVES INTERFACE DISPL AND FORCES I 2 SAVES ALL DATA IN COMMON BLOCK PILPRP I 3 DOES BOTH 00000000004 000000040000000000 NPTRC TRACE PRINT OF PILE NPTRC DURING ITERATIONS QTOT TOTAL LOAD DISP AFTER PRESENT INCR INCR VECT QTOTNOW QTOTLAST CONV CONVERGENCE CRITERION LENGTH MISC 1 MISC 11 ARE SPECIAL PURPOSE PARAMETERS MESCC 1 CHECK EQUATION SOLVER 2 PRINT VECTOR AND SUB MATRICES MISC 2 1 SKIP STIFFNESS MATRIX SYMMETRY ENFORCEMENT AT PILE HEADS Preframe SESAM A 20 10 SEP 2004 Program versi
3. SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 23 ASSIGN STUB BRACE node element STUB dy thk sfy sfz length JOINT node or if the SET ASSIGN OPTION MANUAL NUMBERING is switched ON BRACE node element STUB nodeno eleno dy thk sfy sfz length JOINT node or if the SET ASSIGN OPTION SECTION NUMBER is switched ON BRACE node element STUB secno length JOINT node or if both above alternatives are switched ON BRACE node element STUB nodeno eleno secno length JOINT node and if the modi fied element is not part of an existing member concept name nodel node2 PURPOSE The command assigns a stub section to a member end to one of the incoming braces or to all braces enter ing the joint See Section 3 6 1 regarding the ASSIGN OPTION switches PARAMETERS BRACE JOINT node element dy thk sfy sfz length Assign to selected brace Assign to all braces in joint Node for start of stub section Element to modify Pipe outer diameter default element to split Thickness of pipe wall default element to split Pipe section shear area modifying factor local y axis Pipe section shear area modifying factor local z axis Stub length Preframe SESAM FI OSEP Programversion6 9 nodeno Number of the node to create AUTO may also be given eleno Number of the element to cre
4. CHORD node element CAN nodeno eleno dy thk sfy sfz length JOINT node or if the SET ASSIGN OPTION SECTION NUMBER is switched ON CHORD node element CAN secno length JOINT node or if both above alternatives are switched ON CHORD node element CAN nodeno eleno secno length JOINT node and if the modified element is not part of an existing member concept node2 name nodel PURPOSE The command assigns a can section to member end to one of the incoming chords chord aligned or to both chords entering the joint See Section 3 6 1 regarding the ASSIGN OPTION switches PARAMETERS CHORD Assign to selected part of joint chord or aligned chord JOINT Assign to both chord and aligned chord in joint node Node for start of can section element Element to modify dy Pipe outer diameter default element to split thk Thickness of pipe wall default element to split sfy Pipe section shear area modifying factor local y axis sfz Pipe section shear area modifying factor local z axis length Can length SESAM Preframe Program version ER SA nodeno Number of the node to create AUTO may also be given eleno Number of the element to create AUTO may also be given secno Section number to be used as can strengthening name Name of member to be defined nodel Existing node defining start of member node2
5. Figure 3 23 The zoomed in joint Preframe SESAM 3 40 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 3 17 Printing Data The PRINT command enables printing of any data entered by the user or computed by the program By default the PRINT ALL command which will produce a full report of the model will be directed to a print file All other PRINT commands will by default produce the data on the screen the line mode window for workstations and print window for Windows NT The SET PRINT command may redirect the tabulated data set the name of the print file and change the page size number of lines per page 3 18 Writing input templates to soil stiffness and pile soil analyses The command WRITE GENSOD SPLICE TEMPLATE writes the input files templates to be used by the soil stiffness calculation program Gensod and the soil pile interaction analysis program Splice Using this command presumes that soil profile and piles have been defined in the Preframe model 3 19 Writing end cut data for the jacket installation program The command WRITE END CUT DATA is used to write endcut data for brace to chord connections to sep arate file for use in the Installjac launch program 3 20 Writing and Reading Input Interface File The WRITE command transfers the model to the Input Interface File The READ command reads an Input Interface File into Preframe See Section 2 5 SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 4 1
6. Preframe 3 8 10 SEP 2004 NODE EXTRAPOLATION 201 101 XY PLANE INTERSECT z val 11 06f gt 901 A B01 4 0 B01 s 7 611 4 0 506 f _ 0 dz NG 4 0 e O Y 0 67 20 Jo X m i Sal 4 1 Figure 3 3 Nodes are created by the NODE command 3 2 2 Creating Elements Elements are created by the ELEMENT command and are identified by user chosen maximum seven digit integer numbers Elements can only be created between pairs of nodes that previously have been created or attached to a previously created single node in case of spring and damper to ground elements Alterna tive ways of creating elements are shown below Figure 3 4 illustrates the result of these examples Note The command SET NUMBERING AUTOMATIC ON allows for automatic generation of ele ment numbers in which case the element numbers are omitted in the commands below SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 3 9 First create a single beam element element 11 ELEMENT BEAM 11 101 201 Then create a line of beam elements elements 21 41 61 81 along a line of nodes from node 201 to node 901 ELEMENT BEAM LINE 201 901 21 41 61 81 Note The local beam x axis is defined as pointing from the first to the second node as given in the element definition command Figure 3 4 Elements are created by the ELEMENT command local x axis defined at the same time Preframe SESAM 3 10 10 SE
7. PURPOSE The command defines the transverse stiffness of a shim element The number of d o f s of the matrix must correspond to the number of d o f s of the nodes of the relevant shim elements The transverse stiffness is given in relation to the z axis of the shim element s local coordinate system i e a stiffness in the local x and y directions PARAMETERS matno Material reference number ndofl ndof2 Number of d o f s in local node 1 and node 2 trans stiff Transverse stiffness normal to the local z axis SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 179 PROPERTY MATERIAL matno SPRING TO GROUND STIFFNESS matno SPRING TO GROUND ndof k Koy Kndofndof FLEXIBILITY PURPOSE The command defines a spring to ground material type The matrix may either be given as a stiffness matrix or a flexibility matrix the flexibility matrix must be invertible The number of d o f s ofthe matrix must cor respond to the number of d o f s of the nodes of the relevant spring to ground elements The element k of the stiffness matrix corresponds to the force to be given in the 1 th d o f to get a unit dis placement in the j th d o f The element k j of the flexibility matrix corresponds to the displacement in the th d o f when given a unit force in the j th d o f The matrix values are given in the spring to ground element s local coordinate system The symbol of the sprin
8. NODE WISE node elno dist PURPOSE The command is used to split a beam into two elements PARAMETERS node Node to split from elno Beam element to split dist Distance in length unit from node to insert split node nodeno Node number of the node to be generated AUTO Node element numbers will be generated automatically The numbers will be gen erated in sequence starting with the highest current node element number plus one eleno Element number of the element to be generated NOTES Generated elements inherits material and cross section properties from original beam element All loads given to a beam element prior to the split process will disappear SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 243 TRANSFORMATION TRANSFORMATION trano spx spy spz gpx gpy gpz PURPOSE The command defines a transformed coordinate system The transformation matrix transforms coordinates from a transformed coordinate system to the global coordinate system A transformation can be used e For specifying a fixation or a prescribed displacement in a transformed coordinate system See the BOUNDARY command e For specifying loads and eccentricities in a transformed coordinate system e For defining the orientation of general spring shim spring to ground and damper to ground elements For changing the coordinates of nodes See the CHANGE NODE command
9. elno nodeno PURPOSE The command creates elements described in Table 5 1 Table 5 1 Element types and corresponding nodal properties Number of Illustration in displa Element name nodes of the ele Number of d o f s play and plot ment BEAM BEAS 2 6 TRUSS TESS 2 3 NONSTRUCTURAL 2 6 BEAM BEAS N AXIAL SPRING AXIS 2 6 AXIAL DAMPER AXDA 2 6 SPRING TO GROUND 1 lto6 GSPR DAMPER TO GROUND 1 lto6 GDAM SHIM ELEMENT GLSH 2 1 to6 GENERAL SPRING GLSH 2 1 to6 PILE SOIL PILS 1 6 The BEAM and TRUSS elements require material and cross sectional data which are defined before or after creating the element by the PROPERTY SECTION MATERIAL commands and assigned to the ele ments by the PROPERTY CONNECT command subsequent to their creation The NONSTRUCTURAL BEAM only requires sectional data if wave loads are to be computed by Wajac and it will require both sectional data and material data density only if it shall contribute with mass to the structural analysis The AXIAL SPRING AXIAL DAMPER SPRING TO GROUND DAMPER TO GROUND SHIM ELEMENT and GENERAL SPRING elements only require material data Note that in the case of the Preframe SESAM 5 64 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 SPRING TO GROUND and DAMPER TO GROUND elements the material must be defined prior to cre ating the elements as the material number is referred to in the ELEMENT comma
10. load case ELEMENT POINT select elements GLOBAL LOCAL fx fy fz TRANSFORMATION trano END IMAGINARY COMPLEX ifx jify ifz d PHASE COMPLEX pfx pfy pfz PURPOSE The command defines element point loads Element point loads may only be given at a distance from the element ends of at least 1 200 of the element length The reason for this restriction is that an element point load is converted to an element distributed load acting over 1 100 of the element length The command SET ELEMENT LOAD DISTANCE MODE may be used to specify that the distance to the point where the load is given is from end 1 of the flexible part of the element relevant when eccentricities are defined rather than from the projection of node 1 onto the element axis the default PARAMETERS load case Load case number select elements Select elements see Section 5 1 tran Transformation reference number fxj fyj fzj Real components of the force intensity at a point of distance d from end 1 ifxj 1 y ifzj The corresponding imaginary components pfx pfyj pfz The corresponding phase angle components in degrees The real components are treated as amplitudes d Distance from end 1 NOTES Warning If the element load is defined in the local i e the element s coordinate system then do not change this coordinate system by the PROPERTY LOCAL COORDINATE command as such will not correspon
11. Give eccentricities to HE700B beams section 10 PROPERTY ECCENTRICITY BY SECTION 10 NO GLOBAL 0 0 0 0 0 45 GLOBAL 0 0 0 0 0 45 o o Define a set containing all nodes and elements and copy to main deck DEFINE SET LOWER UNION WITH NODE ALL UNION WITH ELEMENT ALL END COPY SET LOWER 0 0 0 0 12 5 1000 1000 oe ol Change some box sections of the main deck by connecting the proper ones PROPERTY CONNECT SECTION 7 LINE 1001 1002 LINE 1103 1102 LIN 8 LINE 1001 1201 LINE 1003 1203 LIN 1201 1202 NO 1002 1202 NO ru ru i a vu vu i i Ta ie oe Ae Define set for HEB beams with section 9 in main deck only DEFINE SET SECT 9 UNION WITH ELEMENT BY SECTION 9 NO SUBTRACT BY ELEMENT SET LOWER NO END Ao o Define set for HEB beams with section 10 in main deck only DEFINE SET SECT 10 UNION WITH ELEMENT BY SECTION 10 NO SUBTRACT BY ELEMENT SET LOWER NO END D CJ o o l l l Update eccentricities for HEB beams in main deck refer to sets CHANGE ECCENTRICITY SET SECT 9 NO SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 A 9 GLOBAL 0 0 0 0 25 GLOBAL 0 0 0 0 0 25 CHANGE ECCENTRICITY SET SECT 10 NO GLOBAL 0 0 0 0 25 GLOBAL 0 0 0 0 0 4 o o Define braces and c
12. ccceccecscsssceseeeseeeeeeeeceeeteenseeeseensees 4 3 4 1 5 Files used by Preframe 0 cccccccesccsssceseesseeesecaeceseeeeeseeceseecseecseceeeeaeeeseesaeceaeceeeeeseeeseesaees 4 5 4 1 6 Creating Plots for Reportes nieee e a E a aiia 4 6 41 7 Background P ECHO a aa A A aieea 4 6 4 1 8 Command Line Arguments cc eccecccessesseceeceseeeececeeeseecsaecsecnseeeeeeseecseeeseceeeseneeeaeenaees 4 7 Program Requirements sis ieicsshasslectecsdebsayshavess e ctatiss cbedosasheapeashansuanasagean orde ina 4 9 AQ ME XECUMON A a antenatal eee eR ots Suet a0 188s toe 4 9 ADD s Slr gE SS PACS ay esas vats Seashore eas sais o 4 9 4 3 5 1 5 2 Program LOANS a A Reet ect a a a A AAA 4 9 COMMAND DESCRIPTION ccccccsssossscscccscsccsccccccccccccccccccccccscsesescsesesesesescsescsesesees 5 1 The Node and Element Select Features oooonononccnononocononnnnnnnnnonononnonoconnononnonnncononnaconannononannononannonons 5 2 Detailed Description of Commands cccccccssesssceseceseeseeeeseessecsseesecseeceseecseecseceseceeceseeeseenaeeneeneeeags 5 4 ADD IDISPLA Y AA dr SC E ib it 5 6 ACTION td dis att 5 8 ASSIGN Catita air lea 5 9 ASSIGN CAN a E E a E EE 5 10 ASSIGN E DIN O ANE EE A AE A A E E ETA 5 12 ASSIGN HY DRODY NAM O o iia sal 5 14 ASSIGN PIEE DA TA E A EE E A E A A A E iden 5 16 ASSIGN SEGMENT 20 a a A a TATAE 5 18 ASSIGNS OTE DAT AS secede dd e Ad tad 5 19 ASSIGNS TAB SE E OA 5 21 ASSIGN STUB are a E
13. SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 153 PRINT NODE MASS ON NODE MASS ON NODE select nodes PURPOSE The command prints a table of the nodal masses defined The table has the following appearance SUPER ELEMENT TYPE 1 LEVEL 1 EXT INT A S S NO NO X Y Z 401 7 1 000000 2 000000 3 000000 4 000000 5 000000 6 000000 402 43 1 000000 2 000000 3 000000 4 000000 5 000000 6 000000 408 32 6 000000 5 000000 4 000000 3 000000 2 000000 1 000000 columns of the table give from left to right e user defined external node number internal node number initially the first node created is number 1 the last is N where N is the number of nodes optimising the node numbering will change this this number is normally of no interest to the user e the nodal masses the first line for each node gives the translational nodal masses while the second line gives the rotational nodal masses The format of the print of the masses can be changed by the SET PRINT FORMAT command PARAMETERS select nodes Select nodes see Section 5 1 Preframe SESAM 5 154 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 PRINT SECTION YES sctno NO YES SECTION ALL NO OVERVIEW END PURPOSE The command prints cross sectional data Data for a single or all section numbers may be printed or a sim ple overview of the sections Only parameters defining the section may be pr
14. The command log file can be read and modified by a text editor The command input file JNL is an ASCII file which may be read into the program The commands contained on this file will have the same effect as if they where given by the user directly A command input file is convenient for batch execution of Preframe see Section 4 1 7 The file is processed by using the command SET COMMAND INPUT FILE followed by ALL the latter command means read all commands found on the file Alternatively you may specify a command input file when start ing Preframe from Manager The model file MOD is the binary data base containing all model data The file cannot be read by a text editor Preframe SESAM 4 6 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 The print file LIS is an ASCII file which contains tables over data requested for printing by the PRINT command e The plot file contains graphic information produced by the PLOT command The file extension will depend on the plot format chosen see the SET PLOT FORMAT command See Section 4 1 6 for advice on using the CGM format to include plots in reports The Input Interface File FEM termed T file for short contains the model to be read by a subse quent hydrodynamic or structural analysis program Preframe has been designed to protect the user against loss of valuable data However accidental loss of data may occur Th
15. The defaults are accepted by hitting Return Real or integer input may be entered irrespective of type of numerical data use E for exponent e lt will list all legal commands and data options This command is irrelevant for the graphical user inter face where all legal commands and data options are at any time given in the command column of the graphic mode window e P will list all legal commands starting with P e lt two dots will execute the input data before and subsequently abort the current command The program is thereafter ready for more commands If the data before the is incomplete it will be dis carded e lt two commas will cause one default parameter to be accepted May be useful when editing a com mand input file e semicolon will cause default parameters to be accepted until the end of the parameter group or until there is no default provided Text containing blank characters has to be enclosed within single quotes this is a text e percentage sign at the beginning of a line is used for entering a comment Comments will be logged together with commands on the command log file see Section 4 1 5 Note that the program will occasionally log information on the command log file this will appear as comments in between data and comments entered by the user The program information is preceded by two percentage signs to distingu
16. Whenever selecting nodes is relevant the following text will appear SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 3 SELECT NODES and the select options are nodeno GROUP nodel node2 nstep LINE nodel node2 s PLANE nodel node2 node3 SET setname ALL NO Whenever selecting elements is relevant the following text will appear SELECT ELEMENTS and the select options are elno GROUP elnol elno2 estep LINE nodel node2 PLANE nodel node2 node3 BY SECTION secnum BY MATERIAL matum CONNECTED TO NODE _ node select SET setname ALL NO Having selected some nodes elements the program will request the next select directive by either of the prompts unless the ALL option is given in which case the select mode is terminated SELECT MORE NODES NO SELECT MORE ELEMENTS NO NO is the default answer and the select mode is terminated by hitting Return or by entering NO If more nodes elements are to be selected one of the select options described above are given Several select options can be given on the same input line Note that you should not terminate the select mode by as this will abort the current command and no nodes elements will be selected Preframe 5 4 PARAMETERS nodeno elno GROUP LINE
17. 6 LEGGED Generate a six legged jacket 8 LEGGED Generate an eight legged jacket where the two middle legs are parallel launch legs Main dimensions l bot w bot z bot The length width and Z coordinate in the model s cartesian coordinate system of the jacket at the bottom of the legs l top w top z top The length width and Z coordinate in the model s cartesian coordinate system of the jacket at the top of the legs I space The spacing between the launch legs of an 8 LEGGED jacket The spacing is constant 1 e the launch legs are parallel even though the corner legs are not This parameter will not be re quested for 4 and 6 LEGGED jackets Elevations Z coordinates of horizontal bracings Preframe 5 78 z elev Additional bracing BRACINGS X BRACINGS row n ALL LONGITUDINAL ROWS ALL ROWS TRANSVERSE ROW elev no ALL ELEVATIONS Conductors CONDUCTORS x cndct y cndct REGULAR GRID xg yg nx xsp ny ysp BEAMS NODES ONLY NONSTRUCTURAL Assign section numbers SESAM 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 Z coordinates in the model s cartesian coordinate system of the elevations i e the vertical positions of the horizontal brac ings The number of elevations is determined by the number of z elev s entered before concluding with END The first z elev given must be equal to or greater than z bot if equal then the bottom horizontal bracing will be at the bottom of the legs The last z ele
18. Figure 5 19 Local coordinate system defined by a guiding point defining the local z x plane Preframe SESAM 5 172 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 global node2 Figure 5 20 Local coordinate system defined by using the PLANE option to define the local y x plane SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 173 PROPERTY MATERIAL AXIAL DAMPER AXIAL SPRING DAMPER TO GROUND MATERIAL matno GENERAL SPRING LINEAR ELASTIC SHIM MEMBER SPRING TO GROUND PURPOSE The command defines material data There material types are axial damper constant e axial spring constant e damper to ground matrix e general spring stiffness matrix linear elastic material data e transverse stiffness spring constant springs to ground matrix The linear elastic material is relevant for the beam truss and non structural beam elements the other mate rial types belong to the corresponding element types Preframe SESAM 5 174 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 PROPERTY MATERIAL matno AXIAL DAMPER AXIAL SPRING AXIAL DAMPER damp AXIAL SPRING spring matno PURPOSE The command defines an axial damper axial spring material type The axial damping constant corresponds to the force to be applied in order to obtain a unit velocity in the direction of the basic element This facility is used in connection with dynamic analysis The axial spring
19. Node numbers will be re sized SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 223 NODE SYMBOLS Symbols for the nodes will be re sized ONE NODED ELEMENT SYMBOLS Symbols for one node elements will be re sized These are the elements connected to only one node i e SPRING TO GROUND and DAMPER TO GROUND ORIGIN SYMBOLS Symbols for the origin will be re sized SECTION NUMBERS Section numbers will be re sized Preframe SESAM 5 224 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 SET JOURNALLING GRAPHICS ON JOURNALLING as PRINT OFF PURPOSE The command is used to switch ON OFF logging onto the journal file graphic display and print com mands The user may switch these options ON and OFF during the session PARAMETERS GRAPHICS Graphic commands PRINT Print commands ON Switch on OFF Switch off NOTES When journalling of graphics command is turned on the echo from the following commands are put on the journal file DISPLAY RE DISPLAY ADD DISPLAY LABEL ZOOM ROTATE and PLOT Note that the action from the left quick buttons column closest to the graphical display area are not jour nalled Hence only use the right quick buttons column and the ordinary menu buttons when input is given from the graphical input screen and graphics journalling is on By use of journalling of graphics commands e g a sequence of generated plots may be reproduced by the actual journal file If PREFRAME is run in line
20. PARAMETERS PY TZ QZ CODE Define PY TZ QZ codes SKIN FRICTION Define skin friction parameters TIP RESISTANCE Define tip resistance parameters NODE Define the Z level by selecting a node Z LEVEL Define the Z level by manually giving the z value node The node defining the Z level where values are given z level The Z level where values are given py code PY code to be used tz code TZ code to be used qz code QZ code to be used skin cmp Peak skin friction in compression skin tns Peak skin friction in tension Preframe 5 20 g0 soil ds dia rat sig tip pois dt dia rat NOTES SESAM 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 Initial value of soil shear modulus Ratio between displacement to reach peak skin friction and pile diameter Peak tip stress acting at pile tip Soil Poisson ratio Ratio between displacement to reach peak tip stress and pile diameter The data sets defined will be active from the given Z level reference and down to next Z level where similar data set is defined When using the NODE option to define the Z level the command will be logged onto the journal file as Z LEVEL z zz where z zz equals the z co ordinate defined by the selected node This command may also be used to modify existing data See also the Gensod User Manual for specific soil related explanation SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 21
21. ccsscccsssssscsssssssccsssseccsssescccsssssessccssssssccssoeses A 1 A 1 Modelling a Module Frame ccccceccccssecsscessceeeeeseesscensecnseceeeeeeecsaecssensecseeeeseeessecsecsaeeeeseaeenseeneenes A 1 A2 Modelling a Small 4 Legged Jacket with Soil and PileS oooononnnnnncoincnonnnooncccnonncconocononanonn nono A 11 A 3 Result of CHANGE JOINT sel nodes GAP PLANEWISE ooooccooicccononconccncnnoncnnonncnonncnnonncnncnnonos A 20 APPENDIX B THEORY asssscescerssesesiscsccceassstscs cdeaves casesssesddssetscasssiscsaseansseapoiised ccuases casnadscessoses B 1 B1 Formulae for Sectional Parameters 0 cccccccccscccccsssssscccccesessssescccessessassesccssessaseseccusessasseccusessnaees B 1 Bilal BASA A bee ce ieee etic hk ees dde ad B 2 Bl2 IBOX SECUN ss cactee io weet B 3 BALI Channel A aa B 4 B 1 4 Double bottom section oooooccccnnnnnonononecinnnnananonenononanononeconanannnnncnncnnnnnnnononccnnnnnanonacononannnss B 4 Bold DOr HO iz B 5 E a E o PS SA A A A A OR B 6 Bele PIPE a B 7 B 1 8 Un symmetrical I section oc cccccceccsssceeseesseesceeseceseceseesseeeseceaeceseseaeeeseesueceseceeeeeeeeeseesaees B 8 BD e E B 9 BT ERAMOS stews dante bq ie hess cava E B 10 B22 Gonsistent Sets OU ii a ETRE B 11 REFERENCES sccassssscssiessssccsnscsvecessbescndionsenadevs0sis ccesevisesadscsdsescnguadsasses ici REFERENCES 1 SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 1 1 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 Preframe Preprocessor
22. DNY SESAM USER MANUAL Preframe Preprocessor for Generation of Frame Structures DET NORSKE VERITAS SESAM User Manual Preframe Preprocessor for Generation of Frame Structures September 10th 2004 Valid from program version 6 9 Developed and marketed by DET NORSKE VERITAS DNV Software Report No 94 7096 Revision 4 September 10th 2004 Copyright 2004 Det Norske Veritas All rights reserved No part of this book may be reproduced in any form or by any means without permission in writing from the publisher Published by Det Norske Veritas Veritasveien 1 N 1322 Hovik Norway Telephone 47 67 57 99 00 Facsimile 47 67 57 72 72 E mail sales software sesam dnv com E mail support software support dnv com Website www dnv com If any person suffers loss or damage which is proved to have been caused by any negligent act or omission of Det Norske Veritas then Det Norske Veritas shall pay compensation to such person for his proved direct loss or damage However the compensation shall not exceed an amount equal to ten times the fee charged for the service in question provided that the maximum compensation shall never exceed USD 2 millions In this provision Det Norske Veritas shall mean the Foundation Det Norske Veritas as well as all its subsidiaries directors officers employees agents and any other acting on behalf of Det Norske Veritas Table of Contents INTRODUCTION sa
23. See bold text in notes below NOTES The parameters shown in bold below are defined by use of this command Default values are shown Note that the ZSURF parameter is set equal to mudline level but with opposite sign Input parameters referring to Z LEVEL i e the ZCYCL and ZGRWT parameters shall be given Z values according to the superelement global coordinate system Negative value given as input will print out a pos itive value on the GENSOD INP template file If not given by the user the ZCYCL and ZGRWT parameters are set equal to ZSURF KKK KK KK KK KK KK KKKKK CONTROL SECTION 1 000 CONFRC OLD FORCE UNIT CONFRC NEW FORCE UNIT 1MN 1000 1KN 1 000 CONLTH OLD LENGTH UNIT CONLTH NEW LENGTH UNIT 1 3 28 1FT 5 NUMTYP NUMBER OF DIFFERENT SOIL TYPES 13 NUMTOZ NUMBER OF LINES IN THE T Z Q Z DATA TABLE BELOW 15 NUMLAY NUMBER OF SOIL LAYERS 0 NUMDSP NUMBER OF Z LEVELS WITH GIVEN SOIL DISPLACEMENTS Preframe SESAM 5 50 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 1 MIDBOT P Y ETC COMPUTED AT 1 LAYER MIDPOINT 2 LAYER BOTTOM 9 81 GAMMAW UNIT WEIGHT OF WATER 9 81 KN M3 IN SI UNITS 101 30 ATMPRS ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE 101 3 KN M2 IN SI UNITS ZSURF ZCYCL Z LEVEL DOWN TO WHICH CYCLI
24. e Start Preframe as a background job with the file above as input file 4 1 8 Command Line Arguments It is possible to specify command line arguments when starting Preframe A command line argument will influence the program execution in various ways On Unix systems the command line arguments are simply added to the command for starting the program prompt gt preframe NOHEADER STAT OLD INT LINE C F TEST IN JNL FORCED EXIT The command line arguments are PREFIX text NAME text STATUS text INTERFACE LINE INTERFACE PICK HEADER NONE NOHEADER HEADER SHORT WRITE SUPERELEMENT number NOWRITE SUPERELEMENT General file name prefix General file name Data base journal file status Start the program in line mode Start the program in graphical user interface mode Do not show the program header Do not show the program header Show the standard program header Write an Input Interface File with the given superelement number when exiting the program Do not write an Input Interface File Preframe 4 8 COMMAND FILE filename NOCOMMAND FILE FORCED EXIT NOFORCED EXIT EYEDIR X value EYEDIR Y value EYEDIR Z value PLOT FORMAT format PLOT COLOUR ON or OFF PLOT PAGE SIZE size PLOT ORIENTATION 0rientation PRINT FORMFEED format WINDOW SIZE value SESAM 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 Read the specified command input file after the model journal file has be
25. local coordinate system is the same as the global coordinate system Or Ov Pi E 10 10 00 00 14 70 Sh CO Or OO O Tnnnn local coordinate system is the same as the transformed coordinate system corresponding to transformation number nnnn ERR L Error Element length is zero ERR Error Local coordinate system is not orthonormal Element axis has been changed after local coordinate system was defined E g if an eccentricity involving a rotation is introduced or the posi tion of a node is changed after specification of the local coordinate system Preframe SESAM 5 144 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 PARAMETERS select elements Select elements see Section 5 1 SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 145 PRINT MASS OF ELEMENTS MASS OF ELEMENTS select elements PURPOSE The command prints mass weight of selected beam elements The table has the following appearance CENTROID OF STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS X Y Z 0 0000 0 0000 62 4814 ASS MOMENT OF INERTIA OF STR EL ABOUT CENTROID X Y 2 220349 2031 313812 5938 448066 3750 IASS MOMENT OF INERTIA OF STR EL ABOUT ORIGIN x Y Z 1917869 1250 2011332 5000 448066 3750 IASS OF STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS 434 8236 NO OF ELEMENTS CONTRIBUTING 64 PARAMETERS select elements Select elements see Section 5 1 NOTES Print commands are as defau
26. sfy SHARZ modified SHARZ program x sfz A Y Figure 5 28 Pipe section SESAM Program version 6 9 Preframe 10 SEP 2004 5 195 PROPERTY SECTION sctno UNSYM I sctno UNSYM I hz bt bl tt ty bb b2 tb sfy sfz PURPOSE The command defines an un symmetrical I cross section PARAMETERS sctn hz bt bl tt ty bb b2 tb sfy sfz Section reference number Height Width of top flange Width of part of top flange along positive y axis Thickness of top flange Thickness of web Width of bottom flange Width of part of bottom flange along positive y axis Thickness of bottom flange Factors modifying the shear areas calculated by the program The modified shear an are see the PRINT SECTION command for an explanation of the parame SHARY modified SHARY program sfy SHARZ modified SHARZ program x sfz Preframe SESAM 5 196 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 A Z BT lt m i Bl lt gt TT A TY HZ A a o TB y B2 BB a gt Figure 5 29 Un symmetrical I section SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 197 PROPERTY SOIL SAND num gamtot phi ocr SOIL open r p rat tzzres CLAY num gamtot suz0 suz100 epsc ocr api j PURPOSE The command defines the soil types to be referred to from the soil pr
27. Figure 5 11 X bracing created by GENERATE command Preframe SESAM 5 94 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 HELP SUPPORT GENERAL SYNTAX SPECIAL KEYS STATUS LIST HELP PURPOSE The command provides information on subjects The information is printed in the line mode window mes sage window for Windows NT PARAMETERS SUPPORT The telephone and telefax numbers and the Internet address for requesting support is printed together with detailed information on the program version used This in formation is of interest in connection with support requests GENERAL SYNTAX Information on how to enter commands and text is provided SPECIAL KEYS Information on some special keys is provided STATUS LIST If the program is used in line input mode the status list is printed on the screen the program is used in graphical user interface the STATUS program is opened as a separate window with a graphical user interface SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 95 INITIAL CONDITION DISPLACEMENT displ disp2 disp6 VELOCITY velol velo2 velo6 INITIAL CONDITION incono select nodes PURPOSE The command defines initial conditions of selected nodes in terms of displacements and or velocities at time t 0 in a forced response analysis by time integration An initial condition including both displacements and velocities may be assigned to a node simply by re entering the command
28. PLANE BY SECTION BY MATERIAL CONNECTED TO NODE SET nodei nstep elnoi estep secnum matnum matnum node select ALL NO SESAM 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 Number of a node to be selected Number of an element to be selected A group of nodes or elements are to be selected Select the nodes or the elements positioned on a straight line segment defined by two nodes The tolerance or thickness of the line is defined by the SET COORDINATE TOLERANCE command Select the nodes or the elements positioned in a plane defined by three nodes The tolerance or thickness of the plane is de fined by the SET COORDINATE TOLERANCE command Select elements with specific section property Select elements with specific material property Select the elements connected to selected nodes Select the nodes or the elements contained in a previously de fined set Node numbers defining a GROUP LINE or PLANE iis 1 2 The step in the node numbering defining a GROUP of nodes to be selected Element numbers defining a GROUP of elements 1 is 1 2 The step in the element numbering defining a GROUP of ele ments to be selected The number of a property section The number of a property material The number of a property material Select nodes by node select options Select all nodes or elements in the structure Terminate the select mode 5 2 Detailed Description of Commands The input comm
29. SET GRAPHICS INPUT ON OFF INPUT PURPOSE The command switches between graphical user interface and line mode A guide to using the graphical user interface is provided in Section 3 1 This command will also switch to SET GRAPHICS AUTO ON This command is irrelevant in a Windows NT environment as the graphical user interface is the only option for interactive execution of the program SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 219 SET GRAPHICS PLOT FILE PLOT FILE prefix filnam PURPOSE The SET PLOT FILE command has the same functionality as this command you may want to use that one as it is more consistent with the other SET PLOT commands The command sets the name of the plot file By default the plot file will have the same name as the model and command log files The extension of the plot file varies with the plot format see the SET PLOT FOR MAT command PARAMETERS prefix Prefix of the plot file filnam Name of the plot file NOTES This command closes the current plot file if such exists enabling this to be sent to a laser printer without having to exit the execution of Preframe Preframe 5 220 SESAM 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 SET GRAPHICS PRESENTATION PRESENTATION FACET BEAM ELEMENT SILHOUETTE WIRE FRAME ON OFF FILLED ELEMENT CONNECTED ARROWS LOAD NUMERICAL VALUED ARROWS PURPOSE
30. The transformation matrix is defined by giving the global coordinates of a second point SP and a guiding point GP The x axis of the transformed coordinate system XT goes from the origin to SP The trans formed z axis ZT is perpendicular to XT and so that GP lies in the XT ZT plane on the positive ZT side YT is perpendicular to XT and ZT See Figure 5 32 PARAMETERS trano Transformation reference number SPX Spy spz Second point global coordinates gpx gpy gpz Guiding point global coordinates A Zo Figure 5 32 Definition of a transformed coordinate system Preframe SESAM 5 244 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 WRITE sup el no BANDWIDTH OPTIMIZATION sup el no NO OPTIMIZATION sup el no WRITE PROFILE OPTIMIZATION sup el no END CUT DATA GENSOD SPLICE TEMPLATE PURPOSE The command writes an Input Interface File containing the FE model the superelement It is also used to write the tubular bracing end cut data file to be used by the jacket launch program Installjac and to write template input files used to run Gensod and Splice Several consistency checks of the model are performed during writing of the Input Interface File For exam ple e Are there nodes not connected to any elements e Are there elements not having any material assigned Are there beam truss or non structural beam elements not having any section assigned In addition default local coordinate systems a
31. d 0 f 8 Of a Node ccececcceeseesseeseesseceeceeeeeeeecsaecsseeeeeeeeeseeeseenaeens 3 10 3 2 4 Modelling Procedure for Jackets cccecccssecscceseceseeeseeeseesseceseceseeeeeesaeeaseceaeseeeeeeeeseeeaees 3 10 O Y AR ONO 3 14 Properties a dino ao DeAOn ds odas 3 15 33l ECC ani dat AA A A A dadas 3 15 A NAT 3 16 33 39 Local Coordinate System cia dt Ee E co vececas adhe Solsaviveese 3 17 3 3 4 Mate a ae 3 18 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 13 3 14 3 15 3 16 3 17 3 18 3 19 3 20 4 1 4 2 3 3 5 TOSS SCCUON S45 cc E teees a da tacna lastest 3 18 Align Elements cita il setacs velatzsl latch azelisasbecssasbedseecbeateats 3 18 Mem Br E e daa 3 19 Tubular Joint Modelling e ccc ccecccesseesceceseeseceeecescecsaecsaeceaeseceseeeesaecsaecaeeseeseeecaeecsaesaeeenesaeenaeenes 3 20 3 6 1 Assign joint strengthening 0 ec cccccsccesscesseeeeesceeseceeeseeeeceecsaecsaeeeceeeceseeeseeeseceeenseeenes 3 20 3 6 2 Change joint COMO eri aiii 3 21 3 6 3 Advanced gap calculations command PROPERTY GAP ocoonnccnocnccncooncnononnnconccononnonnnos 3 21 Hydrodynamic and Stability Data oonooonnoninnnncnnococonocononononanoon nono nonononnnonncon ccoo non n aran r nn ro nn ran rca nana 3 26 Sol and Pile Model ia lis 3 26 Boundary Condition ccccecccsscesseesseesseeseceseceseeeseeeseceseceseeeseesaecsaeceeseeeseeecsaecssensesseeeeseeneceeeeneeeegs 3 28 Chan ge Data torr ea cha deca hs eau SS cea ROMA E E E
32. eleno STEP startelem stepele AUTO PURPOSE The command is used to split beam elements into two or many elements PARAMETERS elno ndiv EVEN space nodeno STEP startnode stepno AUTO eleno startelem stepele NOTES Beam element to split Number of divisions ndiv 1 nodes and ndiv 1 will be created The element will be divided into ndiv equal part The spacings between the nodes starting from element start If all ndiv spacings are entered they will be interpreted as relative spacings If less than ndiv spacings are entered they will be interpreted as true spacings and the remaining part will be di vided into equal parts Node number s of the node s to be generated Nodes elements numbers will be generated step wise Node number of first generated node The step in node numbering Node element numbers will be generated automatically The numbers will be gen erated in sequence starting with the highest current node element number plus one Element number s of the element s to be generated Element number of first generated element The step in element numbering Generated elements inherits material and cross section properties from original beam element SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 241 All loads given to a beam element prior to the split process will disappear Preframe SESAM 5 242 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 SPLIT NODE WISE nodeno eleno AUTO AUTO
33. 0 0 0 22 0 0 0 ND LEMENT DISTRIBUTED 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 NO GLOBAL 0 0 0 0 85 0 END 0 0 0 0 0 0 85 0 0 0 END END END o mi dd Make supports at each corner a Extra nodes NODE RELATIVE 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 4001 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 4002 201 0 0 0 0 2 0 4201 202 0 0 0 0 2 0 4202 b Create 4 support elements ELEMENT BEAM 4001 4001 1 4002 4002 2 4201 4201 201 4202 4202 202 Ao o c Define a pipe section and connect to elements PROPERTY SECTION 11 PIPE 1 5 0 04 1 0 1 0 PROPERTY CONNECT SECTION 11 4001 4002 4201 4202 NO o o d Define spring to ground stiffness material PROPERTY MATERIAL 1 SPRING TO GROUND STIFFNESS 6 60000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 60000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 800000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1000000 0 0 0 0 0 1000000 0 0 0 1000000 0 e Define spring to ground elements SESAM Program version 6 9 ELEM 5001 5002 4001 GLOBAL 1 4002 GLOBAL 1 5201 5202 4201 GLOBAL 1 4202 GLOBAL 1 END ole oe PROPI PROPI A2 Define material ERTY MATE RIAL 2 Preframe 10 SEP 2004 A 11 ENT SPRING TO GROUND GSPR and connect it to all elements LINEAR ELASTIC 2 1E 8 0 3 7 850 0 0 0 0 ERTY CONN ECT MAT ERIAL 2 ALL Modelling a Small 4 Legged Jacket with S
34. 00 0 00 0 00 1 50 0 5000E 01 0 3000E 01 0 1000E 01 0 01 0 0000E 00 0 50 0 05 3 49 0 5000E 01 0 3000E 01 0 1000E 01 0 01 0 0000E 00 02 50 0 05 3 50 0 1500E 02 0 1100E 02 0 1000E 01 0 01 0 0000E 00 0 50 0 05 5 49 0 1500E 02 0 1100E 02 0 1000E 01 0 01 0 0000E 00 0 50 0 05 5 50 0 4500E 02 0 4500E 02 0 1000E 01 0 01 0 0000E 00 0 50 0 05 14 49 0 4500E 02 0 4500E 02 0 1000E 01 0 01 0 0000E 00 0 50 0 05 14 50 0 7500E 02 0 7500E 02 0 1000E 01 0 01 0 0000E 00 0 50 0 05 27 49 0 7500E 02 0 7500E 02 0 1000E 01 0 01 0 0000E 00 0 50 0 05 27 50 0 1100E 03 0 9500E 02 0 1000E 01 0 01 0 0000E 00 0 50 0 05 36 49 0 1100E 03 0 9500E 02 0 1000E 01 0 01 0 0000E 00 0 50 0 05 36 50 0 1200E 03 0 1200E 03 0 1000E 01 0 01 0 1335E 05 0 50 0 05 101 50 0 1200E 03 0 1200E 03 0 1000E 01 0 01 0 1400E 05 0 50 0 05 KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK SOIL LAYER DIVISIONS AND CODES FOR PY TZ 0Z SECTION P Y CODES 000 Manual 100 N Auto 284 API 84 287 AP1 87 380 DNV 80 T Z CODES 000 Manual 100 N Auto 200 Kraft et al 293 API 93 Q Z CODES 000 Manual 100 N Auto 200 bi linear 293 API 93 LAYERS TY ZBOT PYCODE TZCODE QZCODE 1 T 1 3 50 287 293 293 2 2 2 5 50 287 293 293 3 5 3 14 50 287 293 293 6 9 4 27 50 287 293 293 10 12 5 36 50 287 293 293 13 15 5 45 00 287 293 293 KK KK R KKK KK KK KK AKK MANUAL P Y LATERAL RESISTANCE DATA SECTION LAY DIAM NUMPNT LINE1 P VALUES F L 2 LINE2 Y VALUES L KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KAKA P Y LATERAL RESISTANCE DATA MODIFICATION SECTION LAYERS DIAM P FACT Y FACT Y
35. 00 SIGSRF VERTICAL STRESS AT SURFACE 0 00 DPEMB VERTICAL STRESS UNDER EMBANKMENT LOADING 0 00 AEMB WIDTH A OF EMBANKMENT SLOPING PART 0 00 BEMB PILE POSITION W R T EMBANKMENT TOE POSITIVE OUTSIDE 0 00 DPCIRC VERTICAL STRESS UNDER CIRCULAR LOADED AREA 0 00 RADIUS RADIUS OF CIRCULAR LOADED AREA PILE IS IN CENTER 0 NUMERC NUMBER OF VERTICAL POINT FORCES AT SOIL SURFACE 0 00 POINT FORCE VALUES 0 00 HORIZONTAL DISTANCE TO PILE AXIS This command may also be used to modify existing data The CONFRC and CONLTH parameters are also used on the SPLICE INP template file See also the Gensod User Manual for specific soil related explanation SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 51 DEFINE SET INTERSECTION WITH ELEMENT select elements SET setname SUBTRACT BY NODE select nodes UNION WITH PURPOSE The command defines a set of elements and or nodes that may be referred to in commands where selecting elements or nodes is required DEFINE SET defines a new set while CHANGE SET changes an existing set The command syntaxes of these two commands are identical and based on standard set operators PARAMETERS setname User given name of the SET to define maximum 8 characters and starting with a letter INTERSECTION WITH All elements and nodes except for those subsequently selected will be removed from the set I e the new contents will be the intersection between the current contents
36. 3 3 3 Local Coordinate System Defining local coordinate systems are relevant for beam and non structural beam elements only and is per formed by the PROPERTY LOCAL COORDINATE command The local x axis is by definition the neutral axis of the cross section and pointing from beam end 1 towards beam end 2 Beam ends 1 and 2 are implicitly defined when creating the beam element end 1 is the first node given when creating the element eccentricities will however involve that the beam ends do not coin cide with the nodes Defining a local coordinate system involves determining the orientation of the local y and z axes Preframe will by default determine the local y and z axes see the PROPERTY LOCAL COORDINATE command for an explanation of this Explicit definition will therefore only be required when this default coordinate system is not the desired one In the case of tubular elements the orientation of the local y and z axes has little or no consequence and the PROPERTY LOCAL COORDINATE command need not be used Note Note that defining a local coordinate system for an element by the PROPERTY LOCAL COORDINATE command followed by either introducing an eccentricity by the PROPERTY ECCENTRICITY or the PROPERTY GAP commands or changing a node position by the CHANGE NODE command may lead to an erroneous local coordinate system This because the direction of the local x axis may change while the local y and z axes are fixed This will appear
37. 4 EXECUTION OF PREFRAME This chapter provides information on How to start Preframe How read a Command Input File into Preframe e How to execute Preframe outside Manager Unix only Line mode input syntax e Files used e Creating plots for reports e Alternative execution modes Program requirements e Program limitations 4 1 Program Environment Preframe is available in the following hardware environments e Unix computers of various vendors Windows 98 NT and 2000 often referred to as PC 4 1 1 Starting Preframe from Manager Preframe is started from Manager by clicking Model Frame Preframe The graphical user interface of Preframe is explained in Section 3 1 Preframe SESAM 4 2 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 On Unix the graphical user interface is based on OSF Motif X Window System 4 1 2 Reading a Command Input File into Preframe In the Frame Modelling window opening up when giving Model Frame Preframe in Manager there is a box for specifying a Command input file see Figure 4 1 By default this is set to None Changing this to File name a new box appears in which you may specify a Command input file that will be automatically read into Preframe once the program is started by clicking OK If the box Run interactively after command input file processing is checked Preframe will display the geometry model created by the input file and await interactive user input You may then continue modelling or only veri
38. Existing node defining end of member NOTES For the JOINT option the pipe section parameters must be given twice chord aligned The default can length is calculated according to given parameters see command SET CAN STUB LENGTH PARAME TERS and joint geometry If the pipe section parameters given do not correspond to an existing pipe section a new section will auto matically be created Elements belonging to a member may at any time be modified with respect to section and material by use of the command PROPERTY CONNECT See also CHANGE CAN SET CAN STUB LENGTH PARAMETERS EXAMPLES ASSIGN CAN JOINT 5 Figure 5 1 Create can sections by ASSIGN CAN Preframe SESAM 5 12 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 ASSIGN CONE ANGLE angle CONE node element dy thk sfy sfz LENGTH length or if the SET ASSIGN OPTION MANUAL NUMBERING is switched ON ANGLE angle CONE node element nodeno eleno dy thk sfy sfz LENGTH length or if the SET ASSIGN OPTION SECTION NUMBER is switched ON ANGLE angle CONE node _ element secno LENGTH length or if both above alternatives are switched ON ANGLE _ angle CONE node element nodeno eleno secno LENGTH length and if the modified element is
39. FILE NF14 TO FILE NF16 0 NO 1 YES KARRE AK KA KK KAKA MATERIAL COEFFICIENTS SECTION 1 00 SFTPHI MATERIAL COEFFICIENT ON TAN PHI 1 00 SFSU MATERIAL COEFFICIENT ON UNDRAINED SHEAR STRENGTH 1 00 SFSKF MATERIAL COEFFICIENT ON PILE SKIN FRICTION 1 00 SFSIGT MATERIAL COEFFICIENT ON PILE TIP RESISTANCE KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK PTT E DIAMETERS AND GROUP EFFECTS SECTION 1 NUMDIA NUMBER OF PILE DIAM FOR WHICH P Y T Z 0 Z DATA IS WANTED ds 10000 00 ESOLO E SOIL FOR GROUP EFFECT CALCULATION 1200 00 ESOL1 ESOIL Z ESOLO ESOL1 Z 0 50 POSAVR SOIL AVERAGE POISSON RATIO FOR GROUP EFFECTS KKAKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK K SOIL SURFACE AND GROUND WATER SECTION 1 50 ZSURF Z LEVEL OF NON SCOURED SOIL SURFACE 2 00 SCRGEN DEPTH OF GENERAL SCOUR BELOW ZSURF 4 00 SCRLOC DEPTH OF LOCAL SCOUR BELOW ZSURF 20 00 SLOPE SIDE SLOPE DEGREES OF LOCAL SCOUR HOLES 1 50 ZGRWT Z LEVEL OF GROUND WATER TABLE 9 81 GAMPWP UNIT WEIGHT OF GROUND WATER USED TO FIND PORE WATER PRSS KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK TOADS AT SOIL SURFACE SECTION 0 00 SIGSRE VERTICAL STRESS AT SURFACE 0 00 DPEMB VERTICAL STRESS UNDER EMBANKMENT LOADING 0 00 AEMB WIDTH A OF EMBANKMENT SLOPING PART
40. GRAPHICS SIZE SYMBOL ONE NODED ELEMENTS command The PILE SOIL PILS element is presently not in use Element numbers are limited to seven digits SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 65 ELEMENT GROUP BEAM TRUSS NONSTRUCTURAL BEAM AX IAL SPRING AXIAL DAMPER GENERAL SPRING and SHIM ELE MENT GROUP elnol elno2 estep nodel node2 nstep coord sys where coord sys is relevant only for the GENERAL SPRING and SHIM ELEMENT and is GLOBAL X Y Z LOCAL elnor Z X Y newtrano Y Z X TRANSFORMATION oldtrano PURPOSE The command creates a group of two node elements within a group of nodes The node numbers must be organised in a such a way that there is a constant node numbering step between the first nodes of all ele ments to create and the same constant step between the second nodes Figure 5 3 illustrates this PARAMETERS elnol Number of the first element to create elno2 Number of the last element to create estep Element numbering step elno2 elno1 n 1 where n is the number of ele ments to create node node2 The two nodes of element elnol nstep Node numbering step between the nodes of the elements to create The two nodes nodel nstep node2 nstep are the nodes of element elnol estep GLOBAL The coordinate system of the new element is the same as the global coordinate sys tem LOCAL The coordinate system of the
41. IZ IYZ WXMIN WYMIN WZMIN SHARY SHARZ SHCENY SHCENZ Cross sectional area Torsional moment of inertia about shear centre Moment of inertia about y axis Moment of inertia about z axis Product of inertia about y and z axes Minimum torsional sectional modulus about shear centre Minimum sectional modulus about y axis Minimum sectional modulus about z axis Shear area in the direction of y axis Shear area in the direction of z axis Shear centre location y component Shear centre location z component Preframe SESAM B 2 SY SZ CY CZ 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 Static area moment about y axis Static area moment about z axis Centroid location from bottom right corner y component Centroid location from bottom right corner z component Variables other than the ones above are only temporary Note The local x axis of the beam or truss element goes through the centroid of the cross section Le the nodal displacements and consequently the cross sectional constants above refer to this axis The torsional moment of inertia however refers to the shear centre In most beam element theories the torsional d o f is not coupled to the transverse d o f s Therefore when torsion is of importance the shear centre should not be located far away from the centroid of the cross section i e avoid heavily un symmetrical cross sections B1 1 Bar section B 1 1 1 HZ BB BT SFY SFZ Sectional Dimensions Height Width
42. LOCAL Z AXIS which displays the element z axes near node of the elements Assuming node 1 consistently has the lower Y coordinate define load case 2 by LOAD 2 ELEMENT POINT click elements GLOBAL 2000 0 15000 END 6667 POINT click ele ments GLOBAL 2000 0 15000 END 8 0 END END Load case 3 is a set of concentrated forces in the same positions as for load case 2 e Load case 4 is a set of element distributed loads Since these are constant and distributed over the whole length of the elements the same value is given in both ends and with distance 0 0 from the ends Use the ADD DISPLAY LOAD command to verify the loads Preframe SESAM A 6 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 Create supports and material Use the NODE RELATIVE command to create the four support nodes at elevation 2 e Create the four support elements ELEMENT BEAM Then create the pipe section and connect it Define a spring material by the command PROPERTY MATERIAL 1 SPRING TO GROUND STIFFNESS 6 600000 00 00 00 00 0 0 60000 0 00 00 00 0 0 800000 0 0 0 00 0 0 1000000 0 0 0 0 0 1000000 0 0 0 1000000 0 Define spring to ground elements ELEMENT SPRING TO GROUND at the bottom of the four sup port elements and refer to the spring material defined above Define a steel material and connect it to all elements this assignment will fail for the spring to ground elements which is OK Loads 3 Load case is gravity Main deck 4
43. N where N is the number of loads of the same type for that particular node element This load index has to be specified when loads are changed or deleted The load index is shown in the printout of the load data Loads may be specified as real loads real and imaginary loads or as loads having amplitudes and a phase angles in degrees SESAM Program version 6 9 LOAD load case ELEMENT CONSTANT TEMPERATURE ACROSS 10 SEP 2004 THICKNESS load case ELEMENT CONSTANT TEMPERATURE ACROSS THICKNESS SAME FOR ALL NODES select elements temp DIFFERENT FOR ALL NODES select elements templ temp2 END PURPOSE The command defines element temperature loads for selected elements The values are specified at two nodes of the element or as the same value at both nodes PARAMETERS load case select elements temp temp 1 temp2 Load case number Select elements see Section 5 1 Temperature at both nodes Temperature at node 1 Temperature at node 2 Preframe Preframe SESAM 5 110 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 LOAD load case ELEMENT DISTRIBUTED load case ELEMENT DISTRIBUTED select elements GLOBAL LOCAL fxj fyj fzj TRANSFORMATION trano END IMAGINARY COMPLEX ifxj ifyj ifzj dj 2 PHASE COMPLEX pfxj pfyj pfzj PURPOSE The command defines loads distrib
44. SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 LOAD load case ELEMENT LINE LOAD load case ELEMENT LINE LOAD nodel node2 GLOBAL LOCAL fxj fyj fzj TRANSFORMATION trano END IMAGINARY COMPLEX ifxj ifyj ifzj 2 PHASE COMPLEX pfxj pfyj pfzj PURPOSE The command defines loads distributed along line of selected elements The load intensities are given at start node and end node of chain of elements PARAMETERS load case Load case number nodel Start node node2 End node trano Transformation reference number fxj fyj fzj Real components of the force intensity at a point of distance dj from end j ifxj 1 y ifzj The corresponding imaginary components pfxj pfyj pfzj The corresponding phase angle components in degrees The real components are treated as amplitudes NOTES Warning If the element load is defined in the local i e the element s coordinate system then do not change this coordinate system by the PROPERTY LOCAL COORDINATE command as such will not correspond ingly change the load If required use PROPERTY LOCAL COORDINATE prior to the load definition The resulting loads are implemented as distributed loads on each of the elements along the selected line The user may select between END IMAGINARY COMPLEX and PHASE COMPLEX for the first end only SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 113 LOAD load case ELEMENT POINT
45. SESAM 5 106 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 LINEAR DEPENDENCY TWO NODE DEPENDENCY TWO NODE DEPENDENCY indep nodel dep node FORCE INTO SUPER indep nodel indep node2 FORCE INTO SUPER indep node2 beta PURPOSE The command defines linear dependency of a node on two other nodes All d o f s of the dependent node are dependent of the corresponding d o f s of the first independent node by the factor beta and the second inde pendent node by the factor 1 beta See also Section 3 12 PARAMETERS dep node Node number of the dependent node Slave indep nodel Node number of the first independent node FORCE INTO SUPER Using this option the d o f s of the independent nodes can be forced into SUPERL if they are not SUPER or SUPERL already indep node2 Node number of the second independent node Master beta Linear dependency factor SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 107 LOAD CONSTANT TEMPERATURE ACROSS THICKNESS DISTRIBUTED LINE LOAD POINT ELEMENT LOAD load case GRAVITY FORCE NODE PRESCRIBED ACCELERATION PRESCRIBED DISPLACEMENT ROTATION OF STRUCTURE PURPOSE The command defines loads Loads can be changed by the CHANGE LOAD command and deleted by the DELETE LOAD command The following types of loads can be defined e Nodal loads Nodal forces and moment
46. TY TZ E E Example of element point loads LOADCAS Example of element temperature loads LOADCAS ELEMENT INDEX Ra ELEMENT INDEX LOADCASE DISTANCE FRO El POINT FORCE TX TY TZ TX TY TZ ELEMENT INDEX LOADCASE DISTANCE FRO El POINT FORCE TAE SA TX TY TZ ELEMENT INDEX LOADCASE DISTANCE FRO El POINT FORCE TX TY TZ LOADCASE NODE T1 NODE T1 LOADCASE NODE T1 NODE T1 TEMP DIFF TEMP DIFF ELEMENT INDEX TEMP DIFF TEMP DIFF PARAMETERS load case select elements select nodes 10 SEP 2004 304 1 0000 3 0000 308 1 0000 4 0000 N N N Oo0O0O0OO0O0Quy o O0 0 0 0 0 Ww O Fe 00 0 O O Nab 00 SN US Do WS Bh O DO O Ww O O Os O G Onl OO Oo 1 O OF C 6 O 0 OO oorooorR OC OO 8B 234 204 304 702 701 703 Local load case number Select elements see Section 5 1 Select nodes see Section 5 1 N A 01 N Y LS 15 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 7668 7380 0000 0000 0000 0000 FROM PROJ 3 2 FROM PROJ 6 FROM PROJ Bx 1 FROM PROJ Tz 6 FROM PROJ Ts 4 6 2 SESAM Program version 6 9 5 REAL REAL 5 REAL REAL 5 5 OF NODES 0268 REAL 5485 REAL 5 OF NO
47. The command sets the draw mode for elements and loads PARAMETERS BEAM ELEMENT FACET SILHOUETTE WIRE FRAME FILLED ELEMENT LOAD Set the draw mode for beam elements Tubular elements pipe section will be shown in a faceted mode Non tubes will be shown in a solid mode Tubular elements pipe section will be shown as silhouettes I e the diameter of the pipe is shown Non tubes will be shown in a solid mode as for the FACET op tion All elements are shown as wire frames only I e the neutral axis of the elements are drawn This is the default option When viewing the complete model the WIRE FRAME draw mode ensures a fast update of the picture Switch filling of elements on and off This command is relevant for beam elements only when these are displayed in SILHOUETTE and FACET mode The com mand is also relevant for 2 D elements read into Preframe by the READ com mand Set the display mode for loads see the ADD DISPLAY LOAD command CONNECTED ARROWSLoad values are shown as arrows and with their tails connected NUMERICAL VALUED ARROWS Load values are shown as numerical values Load values are shown as both arrows and with their tails connected and numerical values SESAM Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 SET GRAPHICS SHRINK FACTOR SHRINK FACTOR shrinkfac PURPOSE Preframe 5 221 The command specifies shrinking of the elements The effect is illustrated by the examp
48. and referring to the same initial condition number For data not defined the value 0 0 will be assumed Initial conditions may be changed by the CHANGE INITIAL CONDITION command and deleted by the DELETE INITIAL CONDITION command PARAMETERS incono Initial condition number select nodes Select nodes see Section 5 1 DISPLACEMENT Initial condition in terms of nodal displacements VELOCITY Initial condition in terms of nodal velocities disp 1 disp6 Displacements for the three translational and three rotational d o f s velol velo6 Velocities for the three translational and three rotational d o f s NOTES The initial conditions may only be defined when the model created by Preframe is the complete model i e it contains no super d o f s The initial condition feature is limited to only one set of displacements and or velocities for each node Preframe SESAM 5 96 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 LABEL BOUNDARY CONDITION SYMBOL CONCEPT ATTRIBUTES sub commands ELEMENT NUMBERS LOCAL Y AXIS LOCAL Z AXIS LOCAL COORDINATE MATERIAL NUMBERS MEMBER NAMES LABEL EXTERNAL NODE NUMBER NODE NUMBERS INTERNAL NODE NUMBER ALL NODES NODE SYMBOLS SUPER NODES ONLY ORIGIN SYMBOL PILE NAMES SECTION NUMBERS SOIL DATA sub commands PURPOSE The command adds labels node symbols node numbers names etc to the display The labels are shown until a new di
49. assigned to the member e Reference to stability parameters buckling length effective length factor assigned to the member 2 4 Short Description of Commands A short description of each main command of Preframe is given below ADD DISPLAY adds loads to the model display The command also illustrates a soil profile by use of elements and nodes ALIGN specifies that two or more elements shall remain aligned i e if an end node of a line of elements is moved then all nodes on the line is moved as well to maintain the alignment ASSIGN assigns tubular joint strengthening data cans stubs and cones hydrodynamic data stability data segments to members as well as pile and soil data BOUNDARY defines boundary conditions for the nodes Each d o f of a node may individually be specified as FREE FIXED PRE SCRIBED or SUPER All d o f s are by default FREE CHANGE changes already defined data Nodes elements loads etc may be changed The command is also used to introduce eccentrici Preframe 2 4 COPY CREATE DEFINE DISPLAY ELEMENT GENERATE HELP INITIAL CONDITION LABEL LINEAR DEPENDENCY LOAD SESAM 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 ties offsets to account for required gaps in tubular joints and to update can and stub lengths after joint modifications copies lines planes or sets of nodes and elements creates members out of beam elements defines sets of nodes and elements such sets shou
50. based on selected node and element This option must be used if more than one element is connected to the reference node Select reference nodes for pile heads by use of standard select node options Reference node for pile head Element defining opposite direction of pile direction Z level global co ordinates defining the pile tip Section number for elements in pile Material number for elements in pile The pile name to be given for the ONE BY ONE option only One pile node will be generated in the middle of each soil layer defined in the soil profile Ref command DEFINE SOIL PROFILE SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 89 When using the BY NODE SELECT option the pile name will be Pxxxxx where xxxxx is the node number of the reference node When using the ONE BY ONE option the default proposed pile name is Pxxxxx Nodes and elements forming a pile will be assigned the following node and element numbers 900000 100 n xxxxx where xxxxx is the node number of the reference node and n runs from 0 to N 1 where N is total number of nodes elements generated to represent the pile In addition to the reference node given when creating the pile concepts a pile head node will be defined The pile head node will get an offset equal to 1 100 of the pile outer diameter from the reference node Do not connect a section PROPERTY CONNECT SECTION later in the design process with smaller outer diameter than the
51. between nodes and angles between beam elements button accepts all available default commands and parameters button aborts the current command button accepts a single default value i e the one shown in slanted font Select Node button under heading Select must be depressed the default condition to allow graphi cal selection of nodes Also the Cursor position feedback see below only works when the Node button is depressed Element button under heading Select must be depressed the default condition to allow graphical selection of elements Also the Cursor position feedback see below only works when the Element button is depressed Set button under heading Select is merely a consequence of GUI consistency with other SESAM preprocessors and has little relevance for Preframe e Line mode input The upper line presents the last given input The lower line includes the prompt for input and data entered in line mode On PC you may paste Ctrl V text into the line mode input area Cur sor position feedback The node and element numbers at or close to the cursor position are listed here If more than one node element is within the tolerance of the cursor position then all these nodes elements will be listed This Cursor position feedback only works when the Node Element direct access buttons under head ing Select are depressed This may be utilised as
52. between beam elements Soil types materials for piled structures DEFINE for defining Sets Soil profile soil parameters and certain input data for the program Gensod a part of Splice CREATE for creating members out of beam elements ASSIGN for assigning Tubular joint strengthening data cans stubs and cones Hydrodynamic data hydrodynamic coefficients and flooding information Stability data buckling length and buckling factors SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 2 3 Segments to members splitting into more elements while assembling in members Pile data to pile concepts Soil stiffness data to the soil profile ALIGN for defining alignments of elements members LOAD for defining loads 2 3 Conceptual data Member concepts segmented members have been introduced to be able to hold information about several elements on a straight line between two nodes structural joints Advanced input commands exist to be able to quickly define can stub and conical member segments in the model The member concept is also used to hold non geometric information 1 e hydrodynamic properties and sta bility parameters The member definition contains the following information Element numbers between the two end nodes and in which order Information regarding elements representing can stub and conical member segments e Reference to hydrodynamic properties Cg Cm flooding
53. comprehensive modelling work you may find that editing an input file which initially may have been a log file is an efficient and complementary way of working to running Preframe in interactive mode Preframe creates either a complete model or a first level superelement constituting a part of the complete model The difference between the two as seen from Preframe is that there are some supernodes or super degrees of freedom defined for the latter The term superelement is nevertheless also used for a Preframe SESAM 1 2 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 complete model made by Preframe i e a first level superelement with no supernodes or super degrees of freedom Figure 1 1 Example of a frame model created by Preframe 1 2 Preframe in the SESAM System Additionally to Preframe SESAM comprises a set of preprocessors that are dedicated to various modelling purposes SESAM s preprocessors are Preframe Modelling superelements consisting of beam truss and cable elements Prefem Modelling superelements consisting of beam membrane shell and solid elements Presel Assembling superelements to form the complete model Pretube Modelling of tubular joints In addition to these preprocessors SESAM is comprised of a set of hydrodynamic analysis programs a set of structural analysis programs and a set of postprocessors The SESAM system overview an overview of all major SESAM programs and how they commun
54. concept Assign attribute to selected pile elements part concepts currently not in use due to limitations in Splice Assign to all existing piles SESAM Program version 6 9 BY ELEMENT BY NAME node dens ea ei ga gip tip yield NOTES Preframe 10 SEP 2004 5 17 Assign to existing piles containing at least one of the selected elements Select el ements by use of standard select element options Assign to piles according to specified names NO to end name list Node in structure to rigidly connect the pile head used for pile groups Value of the density fluid attribute Axial stiffness value to replace current one if not zero Bending stiffness value to replace current one if not zero Shear stiffness value to replace current one if not zero Torsion stiffness value to replace current one if not zero Value of the tip code attribute Value of the yield strength attribute The concept attribute is only connected to a pile concept if relevant e g FIXED TO information will only be connected to a pile concept defined as part of a pile group FIXED TO and TIP CODE attributes may only be assigned to parent concept Allowable TIP CODE data are 0 Pile tip is free 1 Pile tip is fixed 2 The pile is assumed to be infinitely long beneath the tip 3 Identical to code 2 except that the axial stiffness is replaced by a secant value computed from pile tip q z data given as input to the
55. constant corresponds to the force to be applied in order to obtain a unit displacement in the direction of the basic element PARAMETERS matno Material reference number damp Axial damping constant spring Axial spring constant SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 175 PROPERTY MATERIAL matno DAMPER TO GROUND matno DAMPER TO GROUND ndof C11 21 Cndof ndof PURPOSE The command defines a damper to ground material type The number of d o f s of the damping matrix must correspond to the number of d o f s of the nodes of the relevant damper to ground elements The damper to ground matrix is the viscous damping matrix The matrix values are given in the local coordinate system of the damper to ground element The symbol of the damper to ground element on the display indicates its positive x axis PARAMETERS matno Material reference number ndof Number of d o f s 01 1 C21 Cndofindof The elements of the lower triangle of the viscous damping matrix The elements are given column by column The elements outside the diagonal will have default val ue 0 0 Preframe SESAM 5 176 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 PROPERTY MATERIAL matno GENERAL SPRING matno GENERAL SPRING ndofl ndof2 k 1 k21 see Kndof ndof PURPOSE The command defines a general spring stiffness matrix The number of d o f s of the matrix must corre spon
56. e Load case 2 is a set of forces on four members in main deck two members along axis 3 and two members along axis 4 as shown to the right The force components are 2000 0 15000 Load case 3 is a set of forces acting in the same positions as load case 2 See illustration to the lower right The force components are 2000 0 15000 Load case 4 is element distributed loads on I beams in main deck see below The components are 0 0 22 on beams in X direction and 0 0 85 on beams in Y direction Load case 2 0 6667 Load case 3 Figure A 4 The loads of the module frame SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 A 7 The line mode commands for creating the complete model are given below Generate nodes and elements along axis A in cellar deck GENERATE BEAM LINE 1 2 7 AUTO AUTO LLO 3860 249 ZA 245 2 9 135 35 o o Define a set containing nodes and elements and copy DEFINE SET LINE A UNION WITH NODE ALL UNION WITH ELEMENT ALL END COPY SET LINE A 0 0 11 0 0 0 100 100 COPY SET LINE A 0 0 22 0 0 0 200 200 Define beams of cellar deck in Y direction ELEMENT BEAM LINE 1 201 AUTO 3 203 AUTO 4 204 AUTO 5 205 AUTO 6 206 AUTO 7 207 AUTO 8 208 AUTO 2 202 AUTO Split beams along axes 2 and 3 SPLIT ELEMENT WISE 8 3 EVEN AUTO AUTO 9 3 EVEN AUTO AUTO 10 3 EVEN AUTO AUTO
57. each of the above formats are given below E formatted output SUPER ELEMENT TYPE EXT INT INI NO NO RX 101 1 0 5000000E 01 0 8000000E 01 105 2 0 1000000E 01 0 5000000E 01 105 2 0 1000000E 01 0 4000000E 01 F formatted output SUPER ELEMENT TYPE EXT INT INI NO NO RX 101 1 5 000000 8 000000 105 2 1 000000 5 000000 105 2 1 000000 4 000000 G formatted output EXT INT INI NO NO RX 101 1 5 000000 8 000000 105 2 1 000000 5 000000 105 2 1 000000 4 000000 DISP 3 LEVEL 1 TIAL CONDTION RY RZ 0 6000000E 01 0 7000000E 01 0 9000000E 01 0 1000000E 02 0 0000000E 00 0 8000000E 01 0 5000000E 01 0 0000000E 00 0 2000000E 01 0 3000000E 01 0 5000000E 01 0 6000000E 01 3 LEVEL T TIAL CONDTION RY RZ 6 000000 7 000000 9 000000 10 000000 0 000000 8 000000 5 000000 0 000000 2 000000 3 000000 5 000000 6 000000 TIAL C O N D T T O N RY RZ 6 000000 7 000000 9 000000 10 00000 0 0000000E 00 8 000000 5 000000 0 0000000E 00 2 000000 3 000000 5 000000 6 000000 DISP VELO Preframe SESAM 5 234 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 SET PRINT PAGESIZE FILE PAGESIZE nlines SCREEN PURPOSE The command decides the number of lines printed for each page on the screen and on the file The number of lines for each page on the screen is the number of lines printed between each time the us
58. element i e in the direction of the local x axis nodeno Node number of the splitting node created AUTO Node element numbers will be generated automatically automatically generated node number will be the highest current node number plus 1 three automatically generated element numbers will be element incremented by 1 2 and 3 If these numbers are occupied by other elements then the element numbers will be the high est current element number plus 1 2 and 3 elno 3 Element numbers of the three elements created STEP Element numbers will be generated step wise first element Element number of first created element element step The step in element numbering NOTES Possible loads defined for the element being split are deleted You may find it convenient to display a panel of the model DISPLAY ELEMENT PLANE and then insert K bracings by clicking the appropriate nodes and elements The SET DEFAULT SECTION command may be used to pre select the appropriate section for the K bracings Note that only the K bracing will be SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 83 assigned this default section the two elements replacing the split element will inherit the section of the orig inal element Use LABEL LOCAL COORDINATE to see which end is end 1 the local y or z axis according to your choice is drawn close to end 1 Note that the SET NUMBERING AUTOMATIC command may be used to switch on automatic assignment of node and ele
59. element number PARAMETERS select elements Select elements by use of standard select element options Preframe 5 48 DEFINE SESAM 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 GENSOD DATA SET sub commands SOIL PURPOSE The command defines data types as explained below PARAMETERS GENSOD DATA SET SOIL The command is used to define the additional data used on the GENSOD INP file The command defines a set of elements and or nodes that may be referred to in commands where selecting elements or nodes is required The command defines the soil profile and layer divisions The sub commands and data are fully explained on the following pages SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 49 DEFINE GENSOD DATA CONTROL confre conlth gammaw atmprs zcycl sustif LOAD AT SOIL SURFACE sigsrf dpemb aemb bemb dpcirc radius GENSOD MATERIAL DATA COEFFICIENT Sftphi sfsu sfskf sfsigt PILE DIAME 10 11 det TERS te eso posav SOIL SURFACE scrgen scrloc slope zgrwt gampwp PURPOSE The command is used to define the additional data used on the GENSOD INP file The data are connected to the following parts of the input file CONTROL SECTION e MATERIAL COEFFICIENTS SECTION e PILE DIAMETERS AND GROUP EFFECTS SECTION e SOIL SURFACE AND GROUND WATER SECTION LOADS AT SOIL SURFACE SECTION PARAMETERS
60. equals gamma wall 68 0 kN m3 on PILGEN INP PROPERTY MATERIAL 2 LINEAR ELASTIC 210 E 06 0 3 6 93 0 0 0 12E 04 o SET ALIGNMENT AUTOMATIC ON o ENERATE BEAM BEAS JACKET 4 LEGGED 0 0 50 0 2 0 50 0 40 0 62 0 0 30 0 60 0 END RACINGS X BRACINGS ALL ROWS 2 END ECTIONS LEGS ALL ELEVATIONS 1 E Z U ORIZONTAL BRACINGS ALL ELEVATIONS 2 zZ U BRACINGS ALL E H EVATIONS 3 Z U daA4xA 4T3000d00a0 zZ U END oP LOAD 1 GRAVITY YES 0 0 0 0 9 81 END LOAD 1 NODE FORCE 10411 10421 10431 10441 NO GLOBAL 500 0 500 0 70000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 END END END END oP PROPERTY CONNECT MATERIAL 1 ALL oe e o N J 10 Kh H pa 10 n O p Q w w w 2l Q n O 5 BK O Eh H D o PROPERTY SOIL SAND 1 19 5 38 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 5E 02 SAND 2 19 5 32 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 5E 02 CLAY 3 19 0 100 0 100 0 0 1 01 1 0 0 5 0 1 0 0 5E 02 CLAY 4 19 0 130 0 130 0 0 1 01 1 0 0 5 0 1 0 0 5E 02 SAND 5 20 0 37 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 5E 02 END DEFINE SOIL PARAMETER MUDLINE LEVEL 1 5 END PROFILE LAYER 1 6 3 50 11 Preframe SESAM Progra
61. f will appear in the next level superelement in the same way as a SUPER d o f There are certain rules as con cerns the boundary condition of a d o f before and after the definition of a linear dependency and whether the linear dependency can at all be defined Table 5 2 describes these rules for the dependent d o f and Table 5 3 for the independent d o f A violation of the rules involves that the linear dependency is not accepted Table 5 2 Rules for boundary condition of a dependent d o f Boundary condition before Boundary condition after Comment FREE LINEAR OK FIXED LINEAR Warning The boundary condition is changed PRESC Illegal LINEAR LINEAR OK implies adding dependency of new d o f s SUPER LINEAR Warning Boundary condition is changed SUPERL E Illegal Linear dependency cannot propa gate Table 5 3 Rules for boundary condition of an independent d o f Comment Boundary condition before Boundary condition after FREE SUPERL OK if FORCE INTO SUPER FIXED SUPERL OK if FORCE INTO SUPER PRESC Illegal cannot be changed to super SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 103 Table 5 3 Rules for boundary condition of an independent d o f LINEAR Illegal d o f is not independent SUPER SUPERL OK SUPERL SUPERL OK Preframe SESAM 5 104 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 LINEAR DEPENDENCY GENERAL NODE DEPENDENCY GENE
62. given do not correspond to an existing pipe section a new section will auto matically be created Elements belonging to a member may at any time be modified with respect to section and material by use of the command PROPERTY CONNECT Preframe 5 30 10 SEP 2004 See also ASSIGN CAN SET CAN STUB LENGTH PARAMETERS SESAM Program version 6 9 SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 31 CHANGE CONE CONE node element length dy thk sfy sfz or if the SET ASSIGN OPTION SECTION NUMBER is switched ON CONE node element length secno PURPOSE The command changes a cone section to a member See Section 3 6 1 regarding the ASSIGN OPTION switches PARAMETERS node Reference node for start of cone element Element to modify length Cone length dy Pipe outer diameter default average of the two elements entering the ref node thk Thickness of pipe wall default largest of the two elements entering ref node sfy Pipe section shear area modifying factor local y axis sfz Pipe section shear area modifying factor local z axis length Length of cone element secno Section number to be used as cone element NOTES When changing the length of a cone the node given for start of cone will be unchanged while the node at the opposite end of the cone element will move If the pipe section parameters given do not correspond to an existing
63. i e they are not shown Note that the chord is determined based on the largest diameter of the tubes coming into the joint And in calculating the chord brace intersections the chord element is assumed to be continuous through the node past the last chord brace intersection and irrespective of whether the aligned element has a smaller diam eter than the chord or whether it exists at all Also note that the intersection curves are the intersections between the outer surface of the chord and the outer surfaces of the braces Note that the gap is calculated as the distance in space not along the chord outside between the two in tersection curves The gap is the smallest distance found The commands LABEL ROTATE SET GRAPHICS and ZOOM cannot be used for a display of a foot print RE DISPLAY re displays the last display without any labelling LABEL annotates node symbols node numbers etc to the displayed model NODE SYMBOLS The following symbols are used yellow diamond i e all six d o f free or fixed blue triangle i e one or more d o f linearly dependent blue octagon i e one or more d o f super Using the DISPLAY NODE command the node symbols are shown automatically NODE NUMBERS ELEMENT NUMBERS Preframe SESAM 3 34 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 SECTION NUMBERS LOCAL COORDINATE adds either the local y or z axis for all elements MATERIAL NUMBERS BOUNDARY CONDITION SYMBOLS A set
64. if defined will still be vertical each conductor is positioned by only one set of X and Y coordinates When using the CONDUCTORS alternative to create conductors a set named CONDUCT will automati cally be created containing the nodes and elements belonging to the conductors This set may be used in connection with making a separate superelement for the conductors see Section 3 2 4 for more information on this Node and element numbering The GENERATE BEAM JACKET command employs a system for numbering the nodes and elements The numbering system for the nodes is as follows also see the example of Figure 5 6 Preframe SESAM 5 80 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 Nodes along the legs have five digit numbers beginning with 1 They can be written as 1ij1 where iis a two digit number identifying the elevation number 00 at the bottom of the legs 01 at the first elevation 02 at the second elevation and so on and j is the leg number 1 4 for four legged 1 6 for six legged and 1 8 for eight legged jackets Nodes of the X bracings have six digit numbers beginning with 3 They can be written as 3ijk1 where iis as above a two digit number identifying the elevation number and j and k are the leg numbers on either side of the node Conductor nodes have six digit numbers beginning with 5 They can be written as 5im1 where iis as above a two digit number identifying the elevation number and m is a two d
65. in seconds s We have already chosen the force unit to be tonnes force tonnef and we know that 1 tonnef 9810 kg m s 10000 kg m s Insert this in the fundamental equation F M L T 10000 kg m s M cm s 10000 kg 100 cm s2 M cm s Hence M 10000 100 kg 10 kg So our fundamental units are M in 10 kg L in cm Tins The next step is to determine the density Young s modulus etc in terms of our fundamental units Steel density p Density Mass Volume M L thus the derived density shall be in 106 kg cm Psteel 7850 kg m 7 85 10 10 kg cm Young s modulus E Young s Modulus Force Area M L T L2 M L 1 thus the derived Young s modulus shall be in 10 kg cm s E 2 1 10 N m 2 1 101 kg m s m 2 1 101 kg m s SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 B 11 Then in our derived units E 2 1 10 10 100 10 kg cm s 2 1 10 10 kg cm s Gravity Gravity Acceleration L T thus our derived gravity unit shall be cm s g 9 81 m s 9 81 10 cm s 981 cm s Sea water density Density Mass Volume M L thus the derived density shall be in 106 kg em Pwater 1025 kg m 1 025 10 10 kg cm B2 2 Consistent Sets of Units Tables over sets of consistent units are provided below Nomenclature cm centimetres E Young s modulus kg kilograms
66. in the plane e select nodes elements contained in a previously defined set see the DEFINE SET command e select nodes elements by use of rubberband select graphical mode a Selection inside a rectangle When ready to select nodes or elements press left mouse button LMB and drag a rectangle around wanted selection This process may be repeated or combined with other select methods to finalize the selection b Selection inside a polygon When ready to select nodes or elements draw the polygon line as explained below 1 Position cursor and press shift key to define the first polygon point 2 While keeping the shift key pressed repeatedly move the cursor and click the LMB to make the polygon If the LMB is pressed rather than clicked a rubberband line appears as an aid to deter mine the position of the polygon segment 3 Release shift key and click LMB to define the last polygon point 4 A straight line between the first and last polygon points closes the polygon use a mixture of the above selection criteria e select all nodes elements in the model Note Whenever a node or element is to be selected the user may either enter the node element number using the keyboard or may when using the graphical user interface see Section 3 1 click the left mouse button on the appropriate node element The availability of such graph ical selection is indicated by an informative text in the pick indication area see Figure 3 2
67. not part of an existing member concept name nodel node2 PURPOSE The command assigns a cone section to a member The conical transition will in PREFRAME and in the analysis be represented by one element without tapered section The reference node given shall have two incoming elements with pipe section of different outer diameter See Section 3 6 1 regarding the ASSIGN OPTION switches PARAMETERS node Reference node for start of cone element Element to modify ANGLE Use the angle option to define cone length LENGTH Use the length option to define cone length angle Cone angle default corresponding to 1 6 length Cone length default corresponding to angle 1 6 dy Pipe outer diameter default average of the two elements entering the ref node thk Thickness of pipe wall default largest of the two elements entering ref node SESAM Program version 6 9 sfy sfz nodeno eleno secno name nodel node2 NOTES Preframe 10 SEP 2004 5 13 Pipe section shear area modifying factor local y axis Pipe section shear area modifying factor local z axis Number of the node to create AUTO may also be given Number of the element to create AUTO may also be given Section number to be used as cone element Name of member to be defined Existing node defining start of member Existing node defining end of member If the pipe section parameters given do not correspond to an exist
68. of the set and the sub sequent selection SUBTRACT BY The subsequently selected elements and nodes will be removed from the set UNION WITH The subsequently selected elements and nodes will be added to the set ELEMENTS Elements are to be selected select elements Select elements see Section 5 1 NODES Nodes are to be selected select nodes Select nodes see Section 5 1 NOTES Initially i e after giving the command DEFINE SET and entering a name of the set the set is empty The first operation to do will therefore be to add to the set by selecting the UNION WITH command Thereafter repetitive set operations may be performed until the content of the set is as desired The operations are exe cuted consecutively the order of the operations is therefore of consequence Finally defining or changing the set is concluded by entering END rather than one of the set operators Sets defined are written to the Input Interface File and transferred through the linear analysis program Sestra to the postprocessors Framework and Postfem where they may be retrieved Sets read from an Input Inter face File see the READ command are available for further manipulations in Preframe Preframe SESAM 5 52 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 EXAMPLES DEFINE S DEFINE SE DEFINE SE 5 3 ETA UNION NODE PLANE 11011 12011 13011 NO END TB UNION ELEMENT PLANE 13011 14011 14061 NO I ETC UNION ELEMENT SET SETB NO UNION NODE PLANE 13011 14
69. oi ota 5 63 ELEMENT GROUP BEAM TRUSS NONSTRUCTURAL BEAM AXIAL SPRING AXIAL DAMPER GENERAL SPRING and SHIM ELEMENT coocccoccocononinnnononnconccononnonncnncnnccncconcnncnnnns 5 65 ELEMENT LINE BEAM TRUSS NONSTRUCTURAL BEAM AXIAL SPRING AXIAL DAMPER GENERAL SPRING and SHIM ELEMENT 0 0 00 oeccc cece ccccssccceessececesseeecesssceceseeeeees 5 67 ELEMENT single GENERAL SPRING and SHIM ELEMENT cecesceecseseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaes 5 69 ELEMENT single SPRING TO GROUND and DAMPER TO GROUND odococcccnnocnninnccnnconncnns 5 70 ELEMENT single BEAM TRUSS NONSTRUCTURAL BEAM AXIAL SPRING and AXIAL DAMPER 0 A a ii 5 72 A EE E EEE EE EETAS EEEE AT EE sacceedbauaens paaceapnauenta tenons 5 73 GENERATE coos E T A A 5 74 GENERATE eltyp JACKE Toi 0 iia 5 76 GENERATE eltyp K BRACING asrnane netnet ia aa E EA TEE E E R 5 82 GENERATE eltyp LINE esssseseessesesssesseserssesseserssesorseessesossrosossesseosostssessosorssesstsersesosseeseososseesesees 5 84 GENERATE eltyp PILE toc id dais 5 86 GENERATE eltyp PILE FROM SOIL 0 ccccccccccesscesseescesscesecesecnseeeceeeaecaaecsseseeeseeeessecaeceeeeeeaes 5 88 GENERATE ltyp T BRACING uta lili iia e adi teats 5 90 GENERATE eltyp X BRACGING cuna donas 5 92 HELP e dlls AA a Seat ets 5 94 INTMAE CONDITION St E E N 5 95 LADE O O I EE 5 96 LABEL CONCEPT ATTRIBUTES areneb i a RO R a aR 5 99 LABEL SOIL DATA oocccoconcnononnnnccnonnacononnnnononnnnocnnnnoconnnnn nono nn no cnn nn nr
70. or program assigned internal node numbers Normally the user is only interested in the ex ternal node number Add the user defined external or program assigned internal node numbers Normally the user is only interested in the ex ternal node number Add symbols for nodes see Figure 5 12 Add symbols for nodes see Figure 5 12 SUPER NODE ONLY Add origin symbol Add pile names Add section numbers do not use together with labelling of ele ment numbers and material numbers as they will superimpose each other Add labels on the display of the soil profile Preframe SESAM 5 98 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 supernode at least one of the d o f s in the node is a super d o f node symbols linearly dependent node free node the translational d o f is fixed at zero displacement boundary condition symbols the rotational d o f is fixed at zero displacement Sy S OO PC both the translational and rotational d o f s are fixed at zero displacement Yo the position of origin Figure 5 12 Symbols produced by the LABEL command SESAM Program version 6 9 Preframe 10 SEP 2004 5 99 LABEL CONCEPT ATTRIBUTES HYDRODYNAMIC INERTIA COEFF DRAG COEFF LOCAL X AXIS LOCAL Y AXIS LOCAL Z AXIS FLOODING COEFF CONCEPT BUCKLING FACTOR LOCAL Y AXIS ATTRIBUTES BUCKLING LENGTH LOCAL Z AXIS FIXED TO GAMMA FLUID TIP CODE YIELD STRENGTH PURPOSE
71. or several piles pile concepts based on selection of node s or one pile based on a specific node and element When using the BY NODE SELECT option it is presumed that it is only one element connected to each of the selected nodes The piles will be generated in the opposite direction of the incoming reference element PARAMETERS CONDUCTOR MAIN PILE GROUP BY NODE SELECT ONE BY ONE node select node element nofseg seglen nofelem sectno matno name Piles will be defined as conductor piles in the concept definitions Piles will be defined as main piles in the concept definitions Piles will be defined as group of piles in the concept definitions Create one or several equal piles based on selected node s Create one pile based on selected node and element This option must be used if more than one element is connected to the reference node Select reference nodes for pile heads by use of standard select node options Reference node for pile head Element defining opposite direction of pile direction Number of pile segments Total length of pile segment loops for nofseg Number of elements in pile segment loops for nofseg Section number for elements in pile segment loops for nofseg Material number for elements in pile segment loops for nofseg The pile name to be given for the ONE BY ONE option only SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 87 NOTES When using the BY NODE SELECT opti
72. pipe section a new section will auto matically be created Elements belonging to a member may at any time be modified with respect to section and material by use of the command PROPERTY CONNECT See also ASSIGN CONE PROPERTY CONNECT Preframe SESAM 5 32 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 CHANGE JOINT CAN STUB LENGTH GAP PLANEWISE gap JOINT node select PURPOSE The command updates joints regarding required length of can and stub sections and for calculation of brace eccentricities to satisfy minimum gap between braces PARAMETERS node select Select nodes by use of ordinary select node options CAN STUB LENGTH Adjust lengths of cans and stubs GAP PLANEWISE Calculate necessary eccentricities to adjust for gap between braces gap Minimum gap between braces NOTES The can and stub lengths are updated according to the geometric rules defined by the SET CAN STUB LENGTH PARAMETERS command and any changes to can stub section geometry or updated brace eccentricity data When a cone segment is connected to a can stub the length of the cone segment is kept unchanged when the length of can stub is adjusted The gaps eccentricities are calculated for braces located within each brace plane entering the joint hence for multi planar arbitrary joint layout the PROPERTY GAP command should be used For braces with larger existing gap than minimum gap the gap will not be re
73. pro gram providing access to the Status List of Preframe defines initial condition at t 0 of nodes for forced response analysis by time integration annotates node symbols node numbers etc to the displayed model makes one or more d o f s of one node linearly dependent on one or more d o f s of one or more independent nodes defines loads for the model The load cases are numbered suc cessively from 1 and up An arbitrary number of loads may be defined for the same node or element in the same load case SESAM Program version 6 9 MASS ON NODE NODE PLOT PRINT PROPERTY RE DISPLAY READ RENUMBER ROTATE SET SPLIT TRANSFORMATION WRITE ZOOM Preframe 10 SEP 2004 2 5 defines additional masses in nodes creates nodes with coordinates generates a plot file of the last display or of the complete model The plot file may be printed or imported in a word processor In a MS Windows environment the plot may also be directed to an on line printer prints tables over model data The tables may be directed to the screen or to a file by the SET PRINT command defines and connects properties to elements Such properties are cross section materials local coordinate systems eccen tricities offsets or rigid ends hinges and soil types displays the view as produced by the last DISPLAY command including possible load display ADD DISPLAY and exclud ing annotations LABEL reads an Input Inte
74. rnann nro nan ancora nr rr nan nr nr cnn nrrrcnannnos 5 101 LINEAR BDEPENDENCY taa a ia ei a bas Vs 5 102 LINEAR DEPENDENCY GENERAL NODE DEPENDENC Y coocccccccccncnnnnananananananananananennnnnns 5 104 LINEAR DEPENDENCY TWO NODE DEPENDENCY nccccccccccncninconananananananananononenancnnnnnnnns 5 106 O A RR 5 107 LOAD load case ELEMENT CONSTANT TEMPERATURE ACROSS THICKNESS 5 109 LOAD load case ELEMENT DISTRIBUTED 0ooococnnncccnnnnonccononnnnnnonnnncconnonononnnncnnnnonccnonanccnonnnoos 5 110 LOAD load case ELEMENT LINE LOAD D aurraren krek E ar e e Ehe E EREEREER 5 112 LOAD load case ELEMENT POINT pokonana TE AEA RAR 5 113 LOAD lodd case GRAVELY us a id A E abi 5 114 LOAD load case NODE FORCE sisse ena e E coronan ncononnnconone nc cnn na R 5 115 LOAD load case NODE PRESCRIBED ACCELERATION DISPLACEMENT 0064 5 116 LOAD load case ROTATION OF STRUCTURE oooococcccnnonccononcnononancccnonnnnononnnccnonnnnonannanocinnonoos 5 117 VENCIO 5 118 NODE2 a A A sd Sack dede dol ed dad Sea el So Pas a 5 119 NODE EXTRAPOLATION uia ias 5 120 NODE GROUP aaia aeaa A E A A O ROA 5 122 NODE INTERSECTION es 5 123 NODELINE 24000 A ti 5 124 NODEREEATIVE unas add dd 5 126 NODES melena AAA A le sk Pak coat alg Yo ORB RSs abso 5 127 PEO Vi E BEE EELS 5 128 PRINTS alas TEEN ETETE 5 131 PRINT CONCEPT ATTRIBUTES S uiri iatna aa EEA AA AE AR AEA Ri 5 132 PRINT DATA CHP GK AT A E SEE ANE 5 134 PRINTECCENTRK ITY sai A a A AON NRA 5 135 PRINT ELEMENT a
75. segment or a plane of nodes and elements The line segment to copy is selected by referring to its extreme nodes and its new position is defined by giving two nodes that previously must have been created The plane to copy is selected by referring to three nodes in the plane not necessarily extreme nodes and its new position by giving three nodes that previously must have been cre ated The triangle formed by the three nodes to be copied must be congruent with the triangle formed by the three nodes of the new position The line segment to copy may be contracted or extended Most but not all data assigned to the elements are copied along with the elements see Section 5 1 for details The copy command will never duplicate nodes or elements Note Member concepts are not be copied When copying elements and nodes which are part of a member concept new elements and nodes will be created but no conceptual information will be copied 3 12 Linear Dependency The LINEAR DEPENDENCY command offers two alternative types of linear dependency e general node dependency two node dependency In the former any d o f of a node the dependent d o f may be made linearly dependent on any other d o f s of any other nodes the independent d o f s The user explicitly specifies the linear dependency factor for all the independent d o f s The displacement of the dependent d o f will then be ra Ti Xby ri2 b 1 3Xb3 where r repres
76. soil data ND ND is a nodal point number internal pile numbering with 1 at pile head The pile will be assumed infinitely long with respect to lateral and torsional solution below node ND To users familiar with PILGEN Note that the DENSITY FLUID attribute corresponds to the gamma fluid parameter previously given in the PILGEN INP file but it is now the unit density and not the unit weight that shall be given For pile groups the fixed to node attribute i e the node to which all piles in the pile group shall be rigidly connected must be assigned to the piles The fixed to node reference used for pile group must have equal Z coordinate as the pile heads See also LABEL CONCEPT ATTRIBUTES Preframe SESAM 5 18 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 ASSIGN SEGMENT SEGMENT node element length or if the SET ASSIGN OPTION MANUAL NUMBERING is switched ON SEGMENT node element nodeno eleno length and if the modified element is not part of an existing member concept name nodel node2 PURPOSE The command assigns a new segment to a member The new element segment will inherit section proper ties from the original element PARAMETERS node Node for start of segment section element Element to modify length Segment length nodeno Number of the node to create AUTO may also be given eleno Number of the element to create AUTO
77. still be able to print and display data Using the READ command involves that the current model and command log file will be closed and a new opened The name of the new model and command log file is according to the input given in the READ command The READ command involves reading of the file prefixTsup el no FEM The Input Interface File is read three times Each time the following message is written n 1 2 3 READING PASS n When the reading has been completed a message giving the number of nodes elements and load cases is printed e g 83 NODES READ 167 ELEMENTS READ 5 LOADCASES READ PARAMETERS prefix General file prefix filnam Model and command log file name sup el no Superelement number NOTES It is not possible to read superelements containing element type no 70 higher level data i e AMATRIX record where all relevant data are stored as stiffness mass damping matrices a s o ref AMD records Preframe can only read one BGRAV gravity card for each load case See also note in connection with the command SET COMMAND INPUT FILE Preframe SESAM 5 200 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 RENUMBER ELEMENT LOADCASE RENUMBER MATERIAL oldnumber newnumber NODE SECTION PURPOSE The command changes the number of previously created nodes and elements as well as the reference number of previously defined load cases materials and cross sec
78. the following approaches e Create or refine the bracing in only one panel use the PROPERTY GAP command to introduce eccen tricities and then copy the panel Elements already existing in the destination e g elements in the leg and horizontal bracing will not be overlapped e Establish a command input file containing the PROPERTY GAP commands and execute these com mands in non interactive mode 3 7 Hydrodynamic and Stability Data Hydrodynamic and some stability data may be assigned to member concepts In Preframe this is called con ceptual attributes The command ASSIGN HYDRODYNAMIC is used to assign hydrodynamic coefficients to selected mem bers The following coefficients may be assigned e Drag coefficient e Inertia coefficient e Flooding parameter i e flooded or non flooded when immersed The command ASSIGN STABILITY is used to assign stability buckling parameters to selected members The following parameters may be assigned Effective buckling factor Buckling length This conceptual information related to members is written to the SESAM Input Interface File and relevant information is read by Wajac and Framework 3 8 Soil and Pile Modelling Modelling of soil profile and piles pile concepts is available in Preframe Special input commands are used to quickly define the soil profile and pile geometry inclusive pile attributes Hence a combined model of the jacket structure and the soil piles may be create
79. the new node 13 is created at the point of intersection of the two lines between nodes 11 and 15 and 12 and 14 respectively In the other example the new node 25 is located at the extrapolation of the two lines Figure 5 15 Creating a node by NODE INTERSECTION Preframe SESAM 5 124 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 NODE LINE nodeno y EVEN LINE nodel node2 ndiv STEP startnode nstep space AUTO PURPOSE The command creates a line of nodes distributed along a straight line segment defined by two previously created nodes PARAMETERS nodel node2 ndiv nodeno STEP startnode nstep AUTO EVEN space EXAMPLES NODE 11 LINE 61 The two existing nodes defining the line segment The direction of the line is from nodel to node2 Number of divisions of the line segment ndiv 1 number of nodes will be created Node numbers of the created nodes The user manually assigns a number to each node Node numbers will be generated stepwise Number of the first created node The step in the node numbering Automatic node numbering The program will generate the node numbers sequen tially starting with the highest current node number plus one The line will be divided into ndiv equal parts The spacings between the nodes starting in nodel If ndiv spacings are entered they will be interpreted as relative spacings If less than ndiv spacings
80. the optimisation facility inside Preframe an in core version Note Unless Sestra s Multifront equation solver is used the optimisation inside Preframe or outside using Bpopt should always be performed or else the CPU time may be excessively large Moreover if the model created is a first level superelement which is to be coupled with other superelements then this optimisation should be performed prior to reading the model into Pre sel HOWEVER DO NOT RUN BPOPT ON MODELS CONTAINING CONCEPTUAL INFORMATION MEMBER AND ATTRIBUTES 2 6 Interaction with other SESAM Programs All model characteristics that can be produced by Preframe are not necessarily accepted by a particular anal ysis program Such consistency should be checked with the documentation of the relevant analysis program Code checks of beam elements may be done by the Framework postprocessor There are some restrictions with respect to how the model is organised and which code checks are available In particular punching shear checks cannot be performed for joints that are supernodes For further information refer to the Frame work User Manual Preframe is able to read a model first level superelement from an Input Interface File This is the case even if the model contains elements loads etc that Preframe itself is unable to create An example is a shell ele ment model generated by Prefem Such a model can be displayed with hidden option if desired and the data may b
81. to ease later reference to this part of the model e The jacket may be inclined the centre of the top is positioned with an offset compared to the bottom The data to give within the command are e Main dimensions like length width and Z coordinate of the bottom and top of the jacket e Elevations Z coordinates of the horizontal bracings Type presently limited to X bracing and position of additional bracing e Vertical conductors only their X and Y coordinates are given each conductor will have a node at each elevation Section numbers previously defined assigned to the various elevations of legs bracings and conductors e Top offset of the jacket if the jacket is inclined i e a horizontal offset of the top of the jacket compared to the bottom the centre of the bottom of the jacket will always have zero X and Y coordinates When specifying bracing note the following A row number in longitudinal direction identifies the panels on both sides of the jacket The transverse row identifies all transverse panels of the jacket i e two panels for a four legged three panels for a six legged and four panels for an eight legged jacket SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 3 11 Below is an example of a command for generating an eight legged jacket The cross sections 1 2 3 and 4 need to be created as these are referred to within the GENERATE command dl tl d2 etc are the diame ters and wall thicknesse
82. when printing the local coordinate systems by a remark ERR O in the right column of the table see the PRINT LOCAL COORDINATE command Preframe SESAM 3 18 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 3 3 4 Material In addition to defining a linear material for the beam truss and non structural beam elements the PROP ERTY MATERIAL command is used to define the properties of springs and dampers Note that the various spring and damper elements have their own type of material i e not the linear material see the PROPERTY MATERIAL command Further note that for all elements but the spring and damper to ground elements the material s is are assigned to the relevant elements by the PROPERTY CONNECT MATERIAL command subsequent to defining the material s For spring and damper to ground elements the proper and previously defined material is referred to at the time of creating the elements 3 3 5 Cross Section Defining cross sections are relevant for beam truss and non structural beam elements only and is performed by the PROPERTY SECTION command For the truss elements however the cross sectional data is only used to compute the cross sectional area Any number of cross sections may be defined each being identi fied by a user chosen integer number Note that subsequent to defining the cross sections they must be assigned to the relevant elements by the PROPERTY CONNECT SECTION command The orientation of the cross section is defined by the PROP
83. with increasing depth 1 e increasing negative Z value This command may also be used to modify existing data See also the Gensod User Manual for specific soil related explanation and Figure 4 1 3 in the Splice test example manual SGP EX Preframe SESAM 5 54 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 DELETE ALIGNMENT select elements BOUNDARY CONDITION __ select nodes ECCENTRICITY select elements ELEMENT select elements HINGE select elements INITIAL CONDITION LINEAR DEPENDENCY select nodes LOAD MASS ON NODE select nodes MATERIAL matn DELETE ALL MEMBER BY ELEMENT BY NAME NODE select nodes PILE CONCEPT SECTION sctn SET setnam SOIL TRANSFORMATION trano UNCONNECTED NODES PURPOSE The commands deletes data previously defined Only the DELETE INITIAL CONDITION and the DELETE LOAD commands are treated in the following pages Some notes are given below for some other alternatives Otherwise see the defining commands PARAMETERS select nodes Select nodes see Section 5 1 select elements Select elements see Section 5 1 ALL Delete all existing members SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 55 BY ELEMENT Delete existing member containing at least one of the selected elements Select el ements by use of standard select element options BY NAME Delete members according to specified names NO to end name list NOTES The DELETE ALIGN
84. 0 00 BEMB PILE POSITION W R T EMBANKMENT TOE POSITIVE OUTSIDE 0 00 DPCIRC VERTICAL STRESS UNDER CIRCULAR LOADED AREA 0 00 RADIUS RADIUS OF CIRCULAR LOADED AREA PILE IS IN CENTER 0 NUMFRC NUMBER OF VERTICAL POINT FORCES AT SOIL SURFACE 0 00 POINT FORCE VALUES 0 00 HORIZONTAL DISTANCE TO PILE AXIS T KERRE EREEREER EERRR SOT TYPE AND PROPERTY SECTION TYP GAMTOT PHI SU Z 0 SU Z 100 EPSC OCR API J GAP TR TX TZZR 1 0 1950E 02 38 00 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 0 00 1 00 0 00 O 1 00 0 005 2 0 1950E 02 32 00 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 0 00 1 00 0 00 O 1 00 0 005 3 0 1900E 02 0 00 0 1000E 03 0 1000E 03 0 01 1 00 0 50 O 1 00 0 005 SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 A 17 4 0 1900E 02 0 00 0 1300E 03 0 1300E 03 0 01 1 00 0 50 0 1 00 0 005 5 0 2000E 02 37 00 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 0 00 1 00 0 00 0 1 00 0 005 KKK KKKK KK KKKKKKKK SKIN FRICTION AND TIP RESISTANCE T Z Q Z SECTION 10 0 ZONINFE ZONE OF INFLUENCE PILE RADIUS FOR TZCODE 200 0 9 RETZ CURVE FITTING FACTOR RF FOR TZCODE 200 ZLEV SKIN CMP SKIN TNS GO SOIL DSTZ D SIG TIP POIS DSOZ D 1 49 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 0 1000E 01 0 00 0 0000E
85. 011 14061 NO E Z l 3 J nm un Ww iy al ND SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 53 DEFINE SOIL PROFILE soil id nofdiv zbotm noflay soityp ab MUDLINE LEVEL z level IL PARAMETER CURVE FITTING FACTOR rftz ZONE OF INFLUENCE zoninf PURPOSE The command defines the soil profile and layer divisions The command also defines the soil parameters used in connection with display of soil profile generation of piles and writing of GENSOD input file PARAMETERS soil id Soil profile id number Currently only id 1 allowed nofdiv Number of soil divisions types in profile zbotm Z level global co ordinates at bottom of division type n noflay Number of layers within the soil division type soityp Soil type to be used in soil division MUDLINE LEVEL Define the Z level global co ordinates for mudline z level The Z level defining mudline CURVE FITTING FACTOR Define the curve fitting factor for TZ code 200 rftz The value to be used for curve fitting default 0 9 ZONE OF INFLUENCE Define the zone of influence pile radius for TZ code 200 zoninf The value to be used for zone of influence default 10 0 NOTES The indicates that the input command will loop and ask for input parameters for each soil division nof div The soil profile Z levels must be given
86. 11 3 EVEN AUTO AUTO oP Je Define beams between axes 2 and 3 ELEMENT BEAM IL 33 10 14 34 11 15 35 12 16 Define beam cross sections PROPERTY SECTION box 1600 x 1000 x 25 x 40 1 BOX 1 6 1 0 0 04 0 025 0 04 1 0 1 0 box 1600 x 800 x 25 x 40 2 BOX 1 6 0 8 0 04 0 025 0 04 1 0 1 0 box 1000 x 1000 x 50 x 50 3 BOX 1 0 1 0 0 05 0 05 0 05 1 0 1 0 Preframe SESAM A 8 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 o l l l box 1000 x 800 x 35 x 35 4 BOX 1 0 0 8 0 035 0 035 0 035 1 0 1 0 box 1000 x 1000 x 35 x 35 5 BOX 1 0 1 0 0 035 0 035 0 035 1 0 1 0 box 800 x 800 x 25 x 25 6 BOX 0 8 0 8 0 025 0 025 0 025 1 0 1 0 box 1500 x 1000 x 25 x 40 7 BOX 1 5 1 0 0 04 0 025 0 04 1 0 1 0 box 1500 x 800 x 25 x 40 8 BOX 1 5 0 8 0 04 0 025 0 04 1 0 1 0 HE1000B 9 I 1 0 0 3 0 036 0 019 0 3 0 036 1 0 1 0 HE700B LOTA 3 070382 0 01 71 03 0 032 1 20 1 40 o l l l o l l l o l l l o l l l o l l l o l l l o o Connect sections to elements PROPERTY CONNECT SECTION 1 LINE 1 2 LINE 103 102 LINE 201 202 NO 2 LINE 1 201 LINE 3 203 LINE 2 202 NO 9 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 NO 10 32 33 101 34 35 NO ae Je Give eccentricities to HE1000B beams section 9 PROPERTY ECCENTRICITY BY SECTION 9 NO GLOBAL 0 0 0 0 0 3 GLOBAL 0 0 0 0 0 3 Ao oP
87. 3E 12 ASS MOMENT OF INERTIA OF STR EL ABOUT ORIGIN X Y A 0 3884492E 13 0 3887367E 13 0 3147469E 12 ASS OF STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS 928669120 0000 NO OF ELEMENTS CONTRIBUTING 118 SUM OF NODE MASSES TX TY TZ 16 0000 18 0000 20 0000 RX RY RZ 22 0000 24 0000 26 0000 NO OF NODES CONTRIBUTING 6 CENTROID OF STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS SESAM Program version 6 9 AND NODE MASS TX AND NODE MASS TY AND NODE MASS TZ xK xK x KKK 10 SEP 2004 0 4593 0 4593 0 4593 Preframe 5 159 0 0415 56 3558 0 0415 56 3558 0 0415 56 3558 Preframe SESAM 5 160 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 PRINT STRUCTURE CONCEPT ALL ALL MEMBER PARENT ONLY PILE STRUCTURE CONCEPT ALL JOINT MEMBER PILE MEMBER INCIDENCES PURPOSE The command prints various tables of the structure concepts The table has the following appearance Example of print member data SUPER ELEMENT TYPE 1 LEVEL 1 STRUCTURE CONCEPT PART CONCEPT NO EXT NUMBER NO NAME TYPE ROLE PARENT CONC START END ELEMENT NODE 1 301422 EMBER UNDEF NONE 2 4 5 2 SEGM IDSEC 1 301422 3 SEGM STUB AN 302433 4 JOINT UNDEF NONE 301421 5 JOINT UNDEF NONE 10221 6 301122 EMBER U
88. 4 Program version 6 9 Use of soil and pile modelling presumes that the Preframe model is defined with global Z axis pointing upwards Generate necessary data in the following order 1 Generate the jacket structure Global Z axis pointing upwards 2 Define the soil data i e mudline level soil types sand clay soil profile soil types and layer divisions skin friction and tip resistance data PY TZ and QZ codes 3 Generate the piles generate piles based on soil profile or user given segment lengths and number of elements add necessary pile data attributes i e yield strength tip code fixed to node reference when pile groups density of fluid inside piles 4 By use of the WRITE command create the SESAM Input Interface File The superelement which contains the piles must be number 1 i e T1 FEM Gensod input template file Splice input template file 3 9 Boundary Condition By default the boundary condition code for all d o f s of all nodes is free Using the BOUNDARY com mand one of the following boundary condition codes may be given to selected d o f s for selected nodes e free e fixed e prescribed e super For a d o f defined as prescribed the prescribed displacement must subsequently be given by the LOAD load case NODE PRESCRIBED DISPLACEMENT command alternatively PRESCRIBED ACCELERA TION When one or more super d o f have been defined the superelem
89. 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 101 LABEL SOIL DATA SOIL TYPE SOIL DATA soil id Z LEVEL PURPOSE The command adds labels on the display of the soil profile PARAMETERS SOIL TYPE Adds the soil types i e SAND CLAY soil number Z LEVEL Z levels at bottom of each soil division type soil id The soil profile id number to be used Currently only id 1 allowed NOTES The command should preferably be used after the ADD DISPLAY SOIL PROFILE command The size of the symbols equals the size used for the element numbers SET GRAPHICS SIZE SYMBOLS ELEMENT NUMBERS value See also SET GRAPHICS SIZE SYMBOLS SESAM Program version 6 9 Preframe 5 102 10 SEP 2004 LINEAR DEPENDENCY GENERAL NODE DEPENDENCY TWO NODE DEPENDENCY END LINEAR DEPENDENCY PURPOSE The command defines the displacements of selected nodes to be linearly dependent of displacements of other selected nodes See also Section 3 12 The GENERAL NODE DEPENDENCY option may couple any d o f of a node the dependent d o f to any other d o f s of any other nodes the independent d o f s The TWO NODE DEPENDENCY option is used to couple all d o f s of a given node to the corresponding d o f s of two other nodes Linear dependencies involves that the dependent d o f s get the boundary condition LINEAR and the inde pendent d o f s get the boundary condition SUPERL SUPER due to linear dependency A SUPERL d o
90. 7 666667 784314 452134 575758 966667 000000 SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 155 SY STATIC AREA MOMENT ABOUT Y AXIS 5 500000 SZ STATIC AREA MOMENT ABOUT Z AXIS 2 890000 CY CENTROID LOC FROM BOTTOM RIGHT CORNER Y COMPONENT 1 700000 CZ CENTROID LOC FROM BOTTOM RIGHT CORNER Z COMPONENT 2 000000 Preframe 10 SEP 2004 5 156 PRINT SOIL PY TZ QZ CODE SKIN FRICTION SOIL TIP RESISTANCE TYPE PURPOSE The command prints an overview of the defined data sets for the selected data types Example of print of PY TZ QZ CODE data SOIL DATA PY TZ QZ COD Gl EVEL SESAM Program version 6 9 SUPER ELEMENT TYPE a Z LEVEL PY CODE TZ CODE 1 50 287 Example of print of SKIN FRICTION data SOIL DATA SKIN FRICTION SUPER ELEMENT TYPE 1 LEVEL 1 PEAK SKIN FRICTION IN INIT VALUE DSPTZ TIP PEA Z LEVEL COMPRESSION TENSION SHEAR MOD DIAM STRESS 1 50 0 5000E 01 0 3000E 01 0 1000E 01 0 01 0 0000 3 50 0 1500E 02 0 1100E 02 0 1000E 01 0 01 0 0000 5 50 0 4500E 02 0 4500E 02 0 1000E 01 0 01 0 0000 14 50 0 7500E 02 0 7500E 02 0 1000E 01 0 01 0 0000 27 50 0 1100E 03 0 9500E 02 0 1000E 01 0 01 0 0000 Example of print of TIP RESISTANCE data SOIL DATA SUPER ELI EM PEA
91. ASSIGN STABILITY MANUAL ky kz BUCKLING FACTOR NPD NS 3472 STABILITY LENGTH BETWEEN JOINTS BUCKLING LENGTH MANUAL ly Iz ALL BY ELEMENT BY NAME PURPOSE The command assigns stability buckling parameters to members PARAMETERS BUCKLING FACTOR MANUAL NPD NS 3472 ky kz BUCKLING LENGTH LENGTH BETWEEN JOINTS ly Iz ALL BY ELEMENTS BY NAME Assign buckling factors Use manually given buckling factors Use buckling factors according to NPD NS 3472 Buckling factor effective length factor local y axis Buckling factor effective length factor local z axis Assign buckling length Use buckling length length between joints Buckling length local y axis Buckling length local z axis Assign to all existing members Assign to existing member containing at least one of the select ed elements Select elements by use of standard select element options If the selection contains elements that are not part of any members new members will be created with the member name equal to element number Assign to members according to specified names NO to end name list Preframe SESAM 5 22 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 NOTES Assigned stability parameters may be labelled by use of the command LABEL CONCEPT ATTRIBUTES STABILITY Stability parameters will be changed overwritten by a new ASSIGN command See also LABEL CONCEPT ATTRIBUTES
92. B y a Figure 5 26 Symmetrical I or H section Preframe 5 192 SESAM 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 PROPERTY SECTION sctno L sctno L hz ty POSITIVE NEGATIVE by tz sfy sfz PURPOSE The command defines an L cross section PARAMETERS sctn hz ty by tz sfy sfz Section reference number Height Thickness of web Width of flange Thickness of flange Factors modifying the shear areas calculated by the program The modified shear es are see the PRINT SECTION command for an explanation of the parame SHARY modified SHARY program Sfy SHARZ modified SHARZ program x sfz POSITIVE NEGATIVE Web location in the local y direction SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 193 AZ AZ k Po E jt gl ey E a a Y ita y ja i l l EN T EEES Sy ADA t BY shear centre Negative Positive Figure 5 27 L section Preframe SESAM 5 194 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 PROPERTY SECTION sctno PIPE sctno PIPE dy t sfy sfz PURPOSE The command defines a pipe cross section PARAMETERS sctn Section reference number dy Outer diameter t Thickness of wall sfy sfz Factors modifying the shear areas calculated by the program The modified shear a are see the PRINT SECTION command for an explanation of the parame SHARY modified SHARY program
93. C P Y DATA SHALL BE GENERATED 101 00 SUSTIF USE STIFF CLAY P Y PROCEDURES IF SU GT SUSTF API ONLY 2 JPRINT PRINTED OUTPUT DATA 0 NONE 1 SOME 2 FULL 1 JECHO ECHO PRINT OF INPUT FILE NF14 TO FILE NF16 0 NO 1 YES AA KKK AKA KKK KAKA MATERIAL COEFFICIENTS SECTION 1 00 SFTPHI MATERIAL COEFFICIENT ON TAN PHI 1 00 SFSU ATERIAL COEFFICIENT ON UNDRAINED SHEAR STRENGTH 1 00 SFSKF ATERIAL COEFFICIENT ON PILE SKIN FRICTION 1 00 SFSIGT MATERIAL COEFFICIENT ON PILE TIP RESISTANCE KKK KKK KK KK RRA RARA PTLE DIAMETERS AND GROUP EFFECTS SECTION 2 NUMDIA NUMBER OF PILE DIAM FOR WHICH P Y T Z 0 Z DATA IS WANTED 0 65 1 25 PILE DIAMETERS 10000 00 ESOLO E SOIL FOR GROUP EFFECT CALCULATION 1200 00 ESOL1 ESOIL Z ESOLO ESOL1 Z 0 50 POSAVR SOIL AVERAGE POISSON RATIO FOR GROUP EFFECTS T KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKEK SOTL SURFACE AND GROUND WATER SECTION mudline ZSURF Z LEVEL OF NON SCOURED SOIL SURFACE 2 00 SCRGEN DEPTH OF GENERAL SCOUR BELOW ZSURF 4 00 SCRLOC DEPTH OF LOCAL SCOUR BELOW ZSURF 20 00 SLOPE SIDE SLOPE DEGREES OF LOCAL SCOUR HOLES Z U OW DW ZSURF ZGRWT LEVEL OF GROUND WATER TABLE 9 81 GAMPWP NIT WEIGHT OF GROUND WATER USED TO FIND POR 7 CI WATER PRSS KKAKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK TOADS AT SOIL SURFACE SECTION 0
94. D FORCE UNIT CONFRC NEW FORCE UNIT 1MN 1000 1KN 1 000 CONLTH OLD LENGTH UNIT CONLTH NEW LENGTH UNIT 1M 3 28 1FT 4 NPH NUMBER OF PILE HEADS INCLUDING DUMMIES 4 NLPH NUMBER OF PILE HEADS WITH GIVEN LOADS 1 JACK CODE FOR PRESENCE OF JACKET 0 NO 1 YES 0 LOAPIL CODE FOR PRESENCE OF LOADS FROM PILGEN 0 NO 1 YES 1 5 NUMLAY NUMBER OF SOIL LAYERS 0 NSDSP NUMBER OF Z LEVELS WITH GIVEN SOIL DISPLACEMENTS T NUMVEC NUMBER OF LOAD VECTORS TO BE ANALYZED 00 ISTART CODE IJ FOR SAVE READ OF RE START VALUES I SAVE J READ 0 ISEC CODE FOR SECOND ORDER MOMENTS O NEGLECT 1 INCLUDE 0111 IPRT1 PRINT CODE IJKL L PILES K LOADS J SOIL I SOIL DISP 0 JECHO ECHO PRINT OF INPUT FILE NF5 TO FILE NF14 0 NO 1 YES 00000 ISC 1 MISC 5 SPECIAL PURPOSE PARAMETERS FERIA RR KK KK KK RARA NAME AND FORMAT OF MATRIX INTERFACE FILE WITH C SUPERSTRUCTURE CONNECTION STIFFNESS MATRIX AND LOAD PREFIX PREFIX E G DIRECTORY NAME OF MATR INTERF FILE NAME C DEFAULT IS BLANK C NAME FILE NAME OF MATRIX INTERFACE FILE M21 G FORMAT FORMAT OF MATR INTF FILE FORMATTED UNFORMATTED NORSAM E DEFAULT IS UNFORMATTED spec for a file of type SIU FORMATTED KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKEK POSTITION OF SPLICE PILE GROUP COORD SYST IN C SUPERSTRUCTURE COORDINTATE SYSTE 180 000 ALPHA ANGLE TO ROTATE THE PILEGROUP AROUND THE SUPERSTRUCTURE 0 000 BETA GLOBAL X RESP Y AXIS TO HAVE PILEGROUP Z AXIS DOWN 0 000 DELTAX THE X Y AND Z COORDINATES IN THE SUPERSTRUCTURE COOR
95. DES 0000 AMPL 0000 PH DEG 0000 AMPL 0000 PH DEG 5 5 OF NODES 0000 REAL 0000 IMAG OF NODES 0000 AMPL 0000 PH DEG 5 OF NODES 0000 REAL SESAM Program version 6 9 PRINT LOCAL COORDINATE LOCAL COORDINATE select elements PURPOSE The command prints a table of the local coordinate systems of the elements EVEL 10 SEP 2004 Preframe 5 143 The table has the following appearance SUPER ELEMENT TYPE EXT LOCAL X EL ND GX GY 101 0 099 0 099 0 102 1 000 0 234 239 734 0 844 0 053 0 139 0 844 0 053 0 1010 1 000 1020 1 000 9005 0 099 0 099 0 9008 0 707 0 534 534 990 707 columns of the table give from left to right e user defined external element number e ND isa redundant value and should be ignored 537 537 707 707 RO Er T O 84 84 00 00 AO E e direction of local x axis in global coordinate system e direction of local y axis in global coordinate system e direction of local z axis in global coordinate system 0 840 0 840 e REM remark the remarks have the following interpretation NONE element has no local coordinate system SPEC local coordinate system specified by the user PROPERTY LOCAL COORDINATE CALC local coordinate system calculated by the program default local coordinate system 700 seh Oo 10 9 9 5 0 995 0 700 GLOB
96. E The command prints a table of eccentricities offsets defined for the elements The table has the following appearance SUPER ELEMENT TYPE 1 LEVEL 1 OFFSETS IN SUPERELEMENT S COORDINATE SYSTEM FROM NODE TO ELEMENT EXT INT ECCENTRICITIES AT ODD NODES ECCENTRICITIES AT EVEN NODES EL EL X Y Z X Y Z 324 12 0 495 0 495 4 951 0 000 3 000 0 000 325 16 2 062 0 767 3 027 0 090 2 738 2 549 424 13 0 495 0 495 4 951 0 000 3 000 0 000 524 14 0 297 0 297 2 970 0 000 5 000 0 000 columns of the table are from left to right e user defined external element number internal element number the first element created is number 1 the last is number NEL where NEL is the number of basic elements this number is normally of no interest to the user e eccentricity at node 1 odd node of the element given as a vector in the global coordinate system e eccentricity at node 2 even node of the element given as a vector in the global coordinate system eccentricities in additional nodes for elements with more than two nodes are given on succeeding lines PARAMETERS select elements Select elements see Section 5 1 Preframe SESAM 5 136 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 PRINT ELEMENT ELEMENT select elements PURPOSE The command prints a table of the basic elements The table has the foll
97. E superfluous Note If you on MS Windows close the Preframe window by the X in the upper right corner or by the Close Alt F4 command of the window menu then the Input Interface File will not be written even though you have requested this when starting Preframe This feature may be used if you change your mind and decide not to write the file after having started Preframe If you run Preframe in a non standard way not using the command Model Frame Preframe in Manager you need to either use a command line argument see Section 4 1 8 or you need to use the command WRITE in order to produce the Input Interface File the T file Preframe SESAM 2 8 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 When a static structural analysis using Sestra and its Multifront equation solver is to be performed the com mand will be WRITE However if a dynamic analysis is to be performed in which case the Supermatrix equation solver of Sestra is employed the command will be WRITE BANDWIDTH OPTIMIZATION This command changes optimises the internal node numbering going from 1 to N where N is the number of nodes in the model in order to minimise the bandwidth of the stiffness matrix The auxiliary program Bpopt may also be used to optimise the bandwidth subsequently to writing the model to the Input Interface File i e using the command WRITE omitting the optional BANDWIDTH OPTIMI ZATION Using Bpopt may be required if the model is too large for
98. E NODE ROTATE on nodes with connected elements which have been given specific local coordinate system which also will have effect on hinges or element eccen tricities When rotating a complete model CHANGE NODE ROTATE trano ALL the alignment attributes must also be deleted prior to rotation Use the command DELETE ALIGNMENT ALL See also TRANSFORMATION Preframe SESAM 5 40 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 CHANGE NODE TRANSLATE TRANSLATE dx dy dz select nodes PURPOSE The command translates selected nodes thereby changing their coordinates May e g be used to elevate all nodes in a deck without affecting other nodes See also Section 3 10 1 PARAMETERS dx dz Translations in the x y and z directions dy select nodes Select nodes see Section 5 1 SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 41 CHANGE STUB BRACE node element STUB dy thk sfy sfz length JOINT node or if the SET ASSIGN OPTION SECTION NUMBER is switched ON BRACE node element STUB secno length JOINT node PURPOSE The command changes a stub section either one of the incoming braces or to all braces entering the joint See Section 3 6 1 regarding the ASSIGN OPTION switch PARAMETERS BRACE Assign to selected brace JOINT Assign to all braces in joint node Node for start of stub section element Element to modify dy P
99. EP 2004 Program version 6 9 SET CAN STUB LENGTH PARAMETER CAN STUB LENGTH PARAMETER canfac canmin stubfac stubmin PURPOSE The command sets the default lengths used when calculating can and stub lengths in tubular joints The default can and stub lengths for tubular joints are calculated according to pre defined geometric rules For typical values see Figure 3 11 PARAMETERS canfac Free can length as fraction of can diameter default 1 4 of Diameter of chord can canmin Minimum free can length default 0 3 m stubfac Free stub length as fraction of stub diameter default diameter of stub brace stubmin Minimum free stub length default 0 6 m NOTES See also ASSIGN CAN ASSIGN STUB SPLIT SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 207 SET COMMAND INPUT FILE COMMAND INPUT FILE filnam PURPOSE The command opens the specified file as a command input file The command will read commands into Preframe See Section 4 1 7 for a description of how Preframe conveniently may be run in batch using the SET COM MAND INPUT FILE command combined with the command The command input file cannot have the same name as the Preframe command log file PARAMETERS filnam Name of the command input file the name is given without the file extension which is required to be JNL NOTES If the command input file opened by this command and executed by
100. ERTY LOCAL COORDINATE command see Section 3 3 3 3 4 Align Elements Two elements on a straight line may be defined as aligned elements by the ALIGN command Changing the position of one of the two extreme nodes CHANGE NODE will then involve that the middle node moves to a new position to maintain the alignment of the two elements see case 1 in Figure 3 9 Several elements on a straight line may also be defined as aligned by defining a chain of aligned pairs see case 2 Finally when two lines of elements intersect each other the elements of the two lines may individually be defined as aligned note that the node may only be moved within the plane defined by the two lines see case 3 Note that only the position of either of the extreme nodes may be changed The command may also be used to align two unaligned elements Simply define them as aligned even though they are not and then go through the process of changing the coordinates of an end node When the switch controlling the automatic alignment is switched on use the command SET ALIGN MENT AUTOMATIC ON elements created by the GENERATE command i e jacket structure line of elements T brace K brace and X brace and the SPLIT command will automatically be assigned alignment attributes The command ALIGN LINE can be used to add alignment attributes to all elements on a straight line between two nodes SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 3 19 case 1 case 2 ca
101. ET LEGAL GAP command prior to the PROP ERTY GAP command The method of moving the brace ends is based on that the brace s perpendicular to the chord is are defined as fixed i e it is they are not moved while the other braces are moved away to ensure proper gaps When no braces are perpendicular to the chord then no braces are defined as fixed Instead the two braces closest to and on each side of a plane perpendicular to the chord are suggested as symmetric elements These are moved the same distance in opposite directions to ensure a proper gap The other braces are moved away from the symmetric elements to ensure proper gaps all through the joint Node 1449 Click here to select __ Chera 1551 node chord aligned for gap calculation Aligned 1651 S Select these braces to be Notice overlap gt gt gt We ee in this er calculation Click here or here to select 2651 as fixed brace Figure 3 12 The footprint display before the gap calculation The next step is therefore to define the fixed brace s and or symmetric elements Preframe determines which brace is closest to being perpendicular to the chord element and suggests this one as the fixed brace You may choose this brace by hitting Return or give another brace element number If you want to define more elements as fixed braces then repeat the FIXED BRACE subcommand and element number for all these elements before
102. Fixation code integer 0 FREE 1 FIXED 2 PRESCRIBED and 4 SUPER GLOBAL Boundary conditions are specified in the global coordinate system TRANSFORMATION Boundary conditions are specified in a rotated coordinate system trano Transformation reference number select nodes Select nodes see Section 5 1 NOTES In addition the boundary conditions LINEAR and SUPERL are defined using the LINEAR DEPEND ENCY command SUPERL has exactly the same effect as SUPER only that it was defined within the LIN EAR DEPENDENCY command A node for which no boundary conditions are defined is FREE for all d o f s A boundary condition code is given for all six d o f s individually Even for nodes with only 3 d o f s six codes must be given Boundary conditions can be given in a rotated coordinate system by the TRANSFORMATION option A nodal load may be given for any boundary condition The PRESCRIBED boundary condition is for defin ing a prescribed displacement or acceleration LOAD lc NODE PRESCRIBED DISPLACEMENT See also Preframe 5 26 10 SEP 2004 ELETE BOUNDARY BOUNDARY CONDITION SYMBOLS RINT NODE BOUNDARY CONDITIONS ET PRINT TABLE NODE BOUNDARY TABLI ADE YU gt w GI E El SESAM Program version 6 9 SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 27 CHANGE CAN CONE ECCENTRICITY ELEMENT HINGE INITIAL CONDITION JOINT LINEAR DEPENDENCY CHANGE LON sub commands MA
103. GAP P PEAK FACT P RESID FACT Y RESID FACT 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 50 1 00 1 0 1 0 KKK KKK KK KK KK KK KAKA MANUAL T Z SKIN FRICTION DATA SECTION LAY DIAM NUMPNT LINEL T VALUES F L 2 LINE2 Z VALUES L KKK KKK KKK KK KAKKAKKA T Z SKIN FRICTION DATA MODIFICATION SECTION LAYERS DIAM CMP FCT TNS FCT TZZ FCT T RESID FCT Z RESID FCT 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Led 1 0 KKK KKK KK KK KK KK KAKA MANUAL QO Z PILE TIP RESISTANCE DATA SECTION LAY DIAM NUMPNT LINE1 Q VALUES F L 2 LINE2 Z VALUES L KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKAKKA O Z PILE TIP RESISTANCE DATA MODIFICATION SECTION LAYERS DIAM CMP FCT TNS FCT QZZ FCT Q RESID FCT Z RESID FCT Preframe SESAM A 18 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 KKK KKK KK KK KA KKK GIVEN SOIL DISPLACEMENTS AND OPEN HOLE SECTION ZLEV DSP X DSP Y DSP Z HOLE DIAM END OF GENSOD INPUT FILE SPLICE INP SPLICE Project OPENED BY PREFRAME 25 SEP 2001 09 00 34 C WARNING This file is a template C It MUST be checked before SPLICE is executed E A a A A a A A E A A A A A A EA ER KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK CONTROL SECTION 1 000 CONFRC OL
104. K S ENT TYPE 1 TIP RESISTANCE EVEL KIN FRICTION IN INIT VALU w w w a ase a E DSPTZ TIP PEAK POISS RATIO POISS DSPQZ DIAM DSPQZ Preframe RATIO 04 50 0 50 GAP TRES VAL TMAX 0 1 00 oO 1 00 O 1 00 1 00 oO 1 00 5 157 DIAM Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 Z LEVEL COMPRESSION TENSION SHEAR MOD DIAM STRESS 36 50 0 1200E 03 0 1200E 03 0 1000E 01 0 01 0 1335E1 101 50 0 1200E 03 0 1200E 03 0 1000E 01 0 01 0 1400E1 Example of print of TYPE data SOIL DATA SOIL TYPE SUPER ELEMENT TYPE 1 LEVEL 1 SOI TOTAL FRICT UNDRAINED SHEAR AT OVER TYP UNIT WEIGHT ANGLE Z 0 0 Z 100 0 EPSC CONS API J 1 0 1950E 02 38 00 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 0 00 1 00 0 00 2 0 1950E 02 32 00 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 0 00 1 00 0 00 3 0 1900E 02 0 00 0 1000E 03 0 1000E 03 0 01 1 00 0 50 4 0 1900E 02 0 00 0 1300E 03 0 1300E 03 0 01 1 00 0 50 5 0 2000E 02 37 00 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 0 00 1 00 0 00 NOTES See also the Gensod User Manual for specific soil related explanation Preframe SESAM 5 158 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 PRINT STATUS YES STATUS NO PURPOSE The command prints a table summarising key data for the model Optionally answer YES additional data is printed coordinates of
105. MENT deletes removes any alignment attributes from selected elements The DELETE BOUNDARY CONDITION command deletes boundary conditions i e the selected nodes will then be FREE for all d o f s Note that the boundary conditions LINEAR and SUPERL see the LIN EAR DEPENDENCY command can only be deleted using the DELETE LINEAR DEPENDENCY com mand The DELETE ELEMENT command deletes selected elements and related element loads The number of d o f s of the nodes are modified if necessary as explained for the ELEMENT command The DELETE LINEAR DEPENDENCY command deletes linear dependencies between nodes The linear dependencies of all selected dependent nodes are deleted Note that the dependent nodes and not the inde pendent nodes are to be given in this command Also note that this command will delete the LINEAR boundary condition of the dependent node It will also delete the SUPERL or SUPER boundary condition of the independent nodes unless other nodes still are linearly dependent of them The DELETE MATERIAL command deletes materials The deletion of a material will remove all refer ences to the material involving that some elements may no longer have a material property The DELETE MEMBER deletes removes the conceptual member information connected to elements and nodes This command does not delete the elements and nodes only the conceptual information including conceptual attributes i e hydrodynamic properties or stability paramete
106. METRIC ELEMENTS Preframe will then calculate the required eccentrici ties offsets and display the result see Figure 3 13 SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 3 25 Node 4449 Chord 155 1 Aligned i651 f 1E 02 45E 02 Notice gap gt Figure 3 13 The footprint display after the gap calculation There is a set of gap values used in the PROPERTY GAP and DISPLAY FOOTPRINT commands Theses are legal gap e display gap e zero gap all having default values set by the program and which may be altered by the SET command The legal gap is used as default value in the PROPERTY GAP command as described above See the DISPLAY FOOTPRINT command for an explanation of the use of the display gap and zero gap values Note that eccentricities computed by the PROPERTY GAP command or specified directly are copied along with elements This is convenient as limiting use of the PROPERTY GAP command saves both man ual work and computing time the command is somewhat resource demanding However when using the GENERATE command to create a jacket as explained in Section 3 2 4 the whole jacket with all its joints may have been created without taking advantage of introducing gaps only once for identical joints The Preframe SESAM 3 26 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 PROPERTY GAP command may therefore have to be used for all joints individually This problem may be reduced by either or both of
107. N 5 23 BOUNDARY citas diia 5 25 CHANGE 0 de ovtoak A EET EET 5 27 CHANGECAN 0 e he A Nek ha sie IU Aia 5 29 CHANGE CONE e atest hed nies Cig abel uk teeter a arama snes arial 5 31 CHANGE JOINT srat oes sieivasccelicn osaivzes yo Seas ced lesa ondanvs ced sunt sa labra nit 5 32 CHANGE LINEAR DEPENDENCY ccccccccccccccessceessscesseccssecsssscesseceseeccessccsussessecssssessseesesseeeas 5 33 CHANGE LOA Distant ia td A 5 35 CHANGE LOAD load case TO MASSES coococooccccocnnnccnonnncononnnnononnncononnononoonnnononno coronan nnronnnnaronnnnos 5 36 CHANGE NODE hal a a at ee OA a dd ios 5 38 CHANGE NODE ROTATE enaa bcos aes ake aa te aid edi eh aie ites 5 39 CHANGE NODE TRANSLATE nirede iane A E K EO E REEE E TAE 5 40 CHANGES TUB a a a e a a a be cs ea a e aSa 5 41 O D LET R tn rr daban 5 43 CREATE 00m a o ida 5 45 CREATE MEMBER cccccccccccccceesscesssecssssessscessscesscecessecusscsussecsssscsseceesecesssecssssesssesessessstecessenees 5 46 CREATE MEMBER FROM ELEMENT ccoocccccconinoncncnnnnnananannnnonononennnnnononononononononanonoconaninanininannnns 5 47 DEPINE a dl R TE E A A iio 5 48 DEFINE GENSOD DATA isis E T TAa EEA dit oia coat 5 49 DERINESE Ta a econ tdo eo eo do 5 51 DEFINE SOTL lt 3 a A ds 5 53 DELETE A dll 5 54 DELETE INITIALECONDETION cta taa alada iaa iodo 5 56 DELETE LOAD rrn ia A E A A a 5 57 DELETE PIEEsCONCER TY lt a A A T a tc it EE 5 59 DELETE SO DL td al A ETE 5 60 DISPLAY on E EEE EE E AREE 5 61 ELEMENT a at
108. NDEF NONE 2 9 5 7 SEG IDSEC 6 301122 8 SEG STUB 6 302434 9 JOINT UNDEF NONE 301121 10 202121 EMBER UNDEF NONE 2 13 5 LI SEG IDSEC 10 202121 12 SEG STUB 10 302435 13 JOINT UNDEF NONE 10211 Example of print pile data SUPER ELEMENT TYPE 1 LEVEL dt STRUCTURE CONCEPT PART CONCEPT NO EXT NUMBER NO NAME TYPE ROLE PARENT CONC START END ELEMENT NODE 43 P71 PILE IAIN NONE 5 49 50 44 PILELE MIDSEC 43 120 45 PILELE MIDSEC 43 121 46 PILELE MIDSEC 43 122 47 PILELE MIDSEC 43 123 48 PILELE MIDSEC 43 124 49 PILJOI UNDEF NONE 112 SESAM Preframe Program version ER 16 50 PILJOI UNDEF NONE 117 PARAMETERS ALL Print all available data MEMBER Print for member concepts only PILE Print for pile concepts only JOINT Print for joint concepts only PARENT ONLY Print parent conceptual information only MEMBER INCIDENCES Print member concepts with corresponding start and end nodes Preframe SESAM 5 162 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 PRINT TRANSFORMATION trano TRANSFORMATION ALL END PURPOSE The command prints the transformation matrices of the user defined transformations the TRANSFORMA TION command A single or all transformation matrices may be printed The table has the following appearance Transformation number 888 T 0 577 0 707 0 408 0 000 0 577 0 707 0 408 0 000 0 577 0 000 0 816 0 000 The fourth column has no meaning in this contex
109. ODE NUMBER ELEMENT NUMBER LOCAL Y AXIS INTERNAL NODE NUMBER SECTION NUMBER LOCAL Z AXIS MATERIAL NUMBER MEMBER NAMES CONCEPT ATTRIBUTES NONE NONE PILE NAMES SOIL NONE Al A2 A3 4 textline A4 AS OTHER plot width PURPOSE The command generates a plot file of the last display AS LAST DISPLAY or the complete model ALL How to send the plot file to an off line plotter or laser printer varies with the installation see the SESAM System Manual 1 Figure 5 18 shows the appearance of a plot The user decides whether origin symbol the first YES NO boundary condition symbols the second YES NO node symbols node numbers element section material numbers or member pile names or concept attribute values and local coordinate symbols are wanted Four lines of text maximum 24 characters each are reproduced on the plot Finally the plot format A1 A2 is chosen Note that possible labelling LABEL command of the screen display will not appear on the plot This is instead achieved by the PLOT command as outlined above The ROTATE and SET GRAPHICS commands however will have impact on the plot Additional subselections to SOIL regarding SOIL TYPE Z LEVEL as described for LABEL SOIL DATA Additional sub selections to CONCEPT ATTRIBUTES regarding HYDRODYNAMIC STABILITY PILE DATA as described for LABEL CONCEPT ATTRIBUTES SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 129 The date and time when the p
110. ORMATION The coordinate system of the new element is the global coordinate system trans formed with the previously defined transformation number oldtrano Preframe SESAM 5 70 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 ELEMENT single SPRING TO GROUND and DAMPER TO GROUND GLOBAL elno nodeno LOCAL elnor newtrano matno TRANSFORMATION oldtrano PURPOSE The command creates a SPRING TO GROUND or a DAMPER TO GROUND element connected to an existing single node PARAMETERS elno Number of the element to create nodeno The node to which the new element is connected GLOBAL The coordinate system of the new element is the same as the global coordinate sys tem LOCAL The coordinate system of the new element is the same as the coordinate system of the previously created element elnor The transformation from the global coordi nate system to the local coordinate system of the new element is stored as a new transformation number newtrano TRANSFORMATION The coordinate system of the new element is the global coordinate system trans formed with the previously defined transformation number oldtrano matno The material number referring to a SPRING TO GROUND stiffness or DAMPER TO GROUND damping matrix that previously must have been defined by the PROPERTY MATERIAL command EXAMPLES ELEMENT SPRING TO GROUND 15 111 GLOBAL 2 See Figure 5 5 left the new SPRING TO GROUND element is given number 15 and
111. P 2004 3 35 SHRINK FACTOR enables a display with elements shrunken in size SIZE SYMBOL sets the sizes of a number of symbols annotated by the LABEL command ZOOM increases or decreases the scale of the display To zoom give the ZOOM IN OUT command point to a corner of the zoom area press and hold the left mouse button drag the pointer to the opposite corner and release the button Figure 3 22 shows how a box is made while dragging the pointer over the zoom area Figure 3 23 shows the result In this display the chord brace intersection curves are clearly seen The DIS PLAY NODE ELEMENT commands will revert to a default scale fitting the complete model within the frame Preframe SESAM 3 36 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 E Dd D D Figure 3 17 The result of the DISPLAY NODE command SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 3 37 Figure 3 19 The result of the DISPLAY JOINT command Preframe SESAM 3 38 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 hs 0 Figure 3 20 The result of the DISPLAY FOOTPRINT command Figure 3 21 The result of the DISPLAY NODE PLANE command with silhouette draw mode SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 3 39 Zoom indication Figure 3 22 Zooming in on the display of a joint YAA
112. P 2004 Program version 6 9 3 2 3 Degrees of Freedom d o f s of a Node The number of degrees of freedom d o f s of a node will always be either three three translations or six three translations plus three rotations The number of d o f s is decided by the element with the highest number of d o f s among the elements connected to the node When giving boundary conditions and loads you must give data corresponding to all six d o f s irrespective of the actual number of d o f s That is you must enter dummy values for non existing d o f s 3 2 4 Modelling Procedure for Jackets For modelling jackets the GENERATE JACKET command is recommended as the most efficient way of establishing the model The command creates the major part of the main structural components of a jacket The remaining modelling typically refining the model by inserting bracings conductor frames and so forth is easily done once the framework of the jacket has been established The command has the following char acteristics Four six and eight legged jackets may be created All legs and the main bracings are created The jacket may have any number of elevations horizontal bracings e Conductors or only the conductor nodes in case conductors will be a separate superelement may be included in the model The conductor frame is not created and must be added afterwards A set named CONDUCT containing all conductor nodes and elements is automatically created
113. Preframe SESAM 5 34 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 NOTES See also DELETE LINEAR DEPENDENCY LINEAR DEPENDENCY PRINT NODE LINEAR DEPENDENCY SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 35 CHANGE LOAD CONSTANT TEMPERATURE ACROSS THICKNESS DISTRIBUTED LINE LOAD POINT ELEMENT GRAVITY LOAD load case FORCE NODE PRESCRIBED ACCELERATION PRESCRIBED DISPLACEMENT ROTATION OF STRUCTURE TO MASSES PURPOSE The command changes loads previously defined by the LOAD command Only load components previously defined may be changed 1 e a load originally defined as an ELEMENT DISTRIBUTED load cannot be changed to an ELEMENT POINT load or to a NODE load Changing ELEMENT GRAVITY NODE and ROTATION OF STRUCTURE loads is done in the same way as defining them by the LOAD command with one exception only a load index has to be given see below Rather than describing these change alternatives here reference is made to the LOAD command The CHANGE TO MASSES command however does not have its counterpart within the LOAD com mand and is therefore described in more detail in the following In changing loads the user specifies the load case the nodes elements and the load index of the load to be changed The load index is used to distinguish between different loads of the same type for the same node element for the
114. R PAGE SIZE Al AS US letter ORIENTATION LANDSCAPE PORTRAIT NOTES A Hewlett Packard plot format File extension is HPG2 The ISO 8632 3 Computer Graphics Metafile CGM plot format binary encod ing File extension is CGM This format is convenient for including plots in re ports see more information on this in Section 4 1 6 Switch ON or OFF colours The default is OFF Colours are supported by the for mats PostScript HPGL 2 and CGM Give this command after the SET PLOT FILE FORMAT commands and prior to the PLOT command Set the plot page size All sizes are not available for all plot formats For SESAM NEUTRAL this setting is irrelevant as the page size is set within the PLOT com mand Give this command after the SET PLOT FILE FORMAT commands and prior to the PLOT command Standard page sizes paper formats See explanation for the PLOT command A4 is the default choice Set the page orientation Landscape orientation Only available for HPGL 2 and PostScript formats Portrait orientation This is default For PostScript and HPGL 2 the size specification in the PLOT command is dummy It will not change the plot size the specification is retained for compatibility with old input files For SESAM NEUTRAL format the SET PLOT PAGE SIZE has no effect as the size specification in the PLOT command is used Preframe 5 230 SET PRINT DESTINATION FILE PRINT FORMAT PAGESIZE
115. RAL NODE DEPENDENCY dep node dep dof findep node indep dof beta PURPOSE The command defines general linear dependency between nodes See also Section 3 12 The dependency is defined by selecting a single d o f of a node to be dependent of any other d o f s To define the other d o f s of the same node also to be dependent the command must be re entered PARAMETERS dep node Node number of the dependent node Slave dep dof D o f to be dependent legal specifications are X Translation in x direction Y Translation in y direction Z Translation in z direction R X Rotation about the x direction R Y Rotation about the y direction R Z Rotation about the z direction END indep node Node number of an independent node Master indep dof The independent d o f to legal specifications are X Translation in x direction Y Translation in y direction Z Translation in z direction R X Rotation about the x direction R Y Rotation about the y direction R Z Rotation about the z direction FORCE X INTO SUPER SESAM Program version 6 9 beta Preframe 10 SEP 2004 5 105 FORCE Y INTO SUPER FORCE Z INTO SUPER FORCE R X INTO SUPER FORCE R Y INTO SUPER FORCE R Z INTO SUPER END If the independent d o f has not previously been defined as SUPERL it will be de fined as SUPERL by giving these alternatives Linear dependency factor Preframe
116. RIGIN SYMBOL VIOLET MEDIUM SECTION NUMBERS YELLOW SUPER NODE SYMBOL PURPOSE The command changes the colours used in display and on plots PARAMETERS self explanatory NOTES DARK LIGHT MEDIUM option not available for BLACK and WHITE SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 215 SET GRAPHICS DEVICE CDC 721 TX4014 15 16 54 TX4105 DEVICE TX4107 09 13 15 X WINDOW WINDOWS DUMMY PURPOSE The command specifies the type of graphics device for output of pictures by the DISPLAY command The alternatives varies with the hardware used The default devices are WINDOWS and X WINDOW for PC and Unix respectively Preframe SESAM 5 216 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 SET GRAPHICS EYE DIRECTION EYE DIRECTION eyex eyey eyez PURPOSE The command specifies the viewpoint used for displaying the model The same effect can be achieved by the ROTATE command PARAMETERS eyex x coordinate of the viewpoint the eye eyey y coordinate of the viewpoint the eye eyez z coordinate of the viewpoint the eye SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 217 SET GRAPHICS HIDDEN ON OFF HIDDEN PURPOSE The command sets the display mode to hidden This is relevant only for DISPLAY JOINT and when the SET GRAPHICS PRESENTATION BEAM ELEMENT FACET command has been used Preframe SESAM 5 218 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9
117. S By default PRINT ALL will go to a file while all other PRINT commands will go to the screen The ALL option prints a complete set of tables for the model i e all data except concepts with attributes available for tabulation will be printed Real values are normally printed in F format for best readability Values too large to be printed within the given field will be indicated as such by asterisks The user may decide to use FORTRAN E or G for mat by using the SET PRINT FORMAT command NOTES See also SET PRINT Preframe SESAM 5 132 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 PRINT CONCEPT ATTRIBUTES HYDRODYNAMIC CONCEPT ATTRIBUTES STABILITY PILE DATA PURPOSE The command prints a table of structural concept attributes hydrodynamic stability or pile parameters connected to the concepts The table has the following appearance Example of print member data SUPER ELEMENT TYPE 1 LEVEL 1 gt CONCEPT gt 5 2222 Soe Seco See se eS ATTRIBUTES Hene NO NAME Type Attrib Value Attrib Value Attrib Value 1 301422 HYDRO Floo 1 0000 HYDRO CDy 0 7000 CDz 0 7000 HYDRO CMy 2 0000 CMz 2 0000 6 301122 HYDRO Floo 1 0000 HYDRO CDy 0 7000 CDz 0 7000 HYDRO CMy 2 0000 CMz 2 0000 CODE BL
118. S X BRACINGS LEGS Assign section numbers to the conductors horizontal bracings legs X bracings accordingly elev n Elevation number at which the subsequently given section number applies ALL ELEVATIONS The subsequently given section number applies to all eleva tions BOTTOM ELEVATION The subsequently given section number applies to the bottom elevations i e the elevation between the bottom of the jacket and the lowest horizontal bracing sctno Section number that previously must have been defined NONE No section number is assigned Possible top offset TOP OFFSET The jacket has a horizontal offset of the centre of the jacket at top at z top compared to the centre of the jacket at bottom at z bot See the notes below on the effect of an offset on possible conductors x offset y offset The horizontal offset of the top of the jacket NOTES For efficient use of this command define first the appropriate sections and refer to these within the com mand Otherwise the appropriate sections must be assigned connected afterwards Note that X 0 and Y 0 in the model s cartesian coordinate system will be in the centre of the jacket The vertical position of the origin is determined by the Z coordinate given for the bottom of the legs The Z coordinate of the top of the legs will implicitly define the height of the jacket Even if an offset of the top of the jacket is specified i e the jacket is askew the conductors
119. SECTION command The eccentricities of the I beams in the main deck must be changed to flush with the new box sections This may be done as follows First define a set containing all elements in the main deck with section 9 and then refer to this set when changing the eccentricities DEFINE SET SECT 9 UNION WITH ELEMENT BY SECTION 9 NO SUBTRACT BY ELEMENT SET LOWER NO END CHANGE ECCENTRICITY SET SECT 9 NO GLOBAL 0 0 0 0 0 25 GLOBAL 0 0 0 0 0 25 e Change eccentricities of I beams in the main deck with section 10 in a similar way The new eccentricity is 0 4 The main deck is complete Now model the braces and columns Define elements for all columns and braces using the ELEMENT BEAM command e Connect sections to these elements The default local coordinate systems assigned to the elements are OK for all elements except for the four braces between cellar and main deck along axes A and C see Figure A 3 Use the command PROPERTY LOCAL COORDINATE ZX PLANE Y GLOBAL INFINITY to ensure that their local z axes point in global Y direction The braces and columns are complete Now create the loads See Figure A 4 for data e Load case is gravity LOAD 1 GRAVITY YES 0 0 0 0 9 81 e Load case 2 is a set of concentrated forces on beam elements The command asks for the distance from node 1 of the beam elements to the load Which end is node 1 depends on how the elements were defined Find node 1 by using the command LABEL LOCAL COORDINATE
120. SS ON NODE MATERIAL NODE SECTION SET STUB TRANSFORMATION PURPOSE The command changes data previously defined Most of the sub commands have identical or very similar syntax with the commands defining the data Therefore rather than describing these sub commands in detail here reference is made to the commands defining the data However some CHANGE commands demand special explanation which is found on the following pages NOTES The CHANGE ELEMENT command changes the node s to which an element is connected Element type and data assigned to the element cannot be changed The command will therefore only request the new node number s of the element The CHANGE MATERIAL command changes previously defined materials Only the parameters the val ues describing the material can be changed the material type itself cannot be changed Thus it is not possi ble to change e g an AXIAL SPRING material to a SPRING TO GROUND material With the exception that the material type is not requested the command is equal to the command for defining materials PROP ERTY MATERIAL see this The CHANGE SECTION command changes previously defined cross sections Only the parameters the values describing the cross section can be changed the cross section type itself cannot be changed Thus it Preframe SESAM 5 28 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 is not possible to change e g a PIPE c
121. TABLE PURPOSE 10 SEP 2004 SESAM Program version 6 9 The command sets different parameters controlling the execution of the PRINT command SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 231 SET PRINT DESTINATION SCREEN DESTINATION FILE PURPOSE The command switches the print between the screen and a file The command PRINT ALL will regardless of this selection direct the print to a file PARAMETERS SCREEN Print will be directed to the screen FILE Print will be directed to a file Preframe SESAM 5 232 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 SET PRINT FILE LINEPRINTER NAME filnam FILE PURPOSE The command decides where the print to file is sent It is either sent directly to the line printer or to the spec ified file Print to file is by default sent to a file with the same name as the model and command log file The file extension will always be LIS PARAMETERS LINEPRINTER Connected line printer NAME Name of a print file is to be specified filnam File name given without the file extension SESAM Program version 6 9 SET PRINT FORMAT FORMAT F PURPOSE 10 SEP 2004 Preframe 5 233 The command decides which FORTRAN format to use when tabulating certain data By default F format is used whenever possible Large real values cannot be printed in F format the user may in such cases specify E or G format Examples of output in
122. This command labels the concept attribute values connected to the displayed member concepts PARAMETERS HYDRODYNAMIC DRAG COEFF INERTIA COEFF FLOODING COEFF STABILITY BUCKLING FACTOR BUCKLING LENGTH LOCAL X AXIS LOCAL Y AXIS LOCAL Z AXIS PILE DATA FIXED TO GAMMA FLUID Add hydrodynamic attributes assigned to concepts Add drag coefficient value Add inertia coefficient value Add flooding coefficient value Add stability parameters assigned to concepts Add buckling factor value Add buckling length value Add value assigned to local x axis Add value assigned to local y axis Add value assigned to local z axis Add the concept attribute values connected to the displayed pile concepts Label the pile group fixed to node reference Label the unit weight of fluid soil inside the pile Preframe SESAM 5 100 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 TIP CODE Label the pile tip boundary condition code YIELD STRENGTH Label the pile material yield strength NOTES The command should preferably be used after the DISPLAY MEMBER PILE command The size of the symbols equals the size used for the element numbers SET GRAPHICS SIZE SYMBOLS ELEMENT NUMBERS value An attribute belonging to a pile concept parent concept is shown in green colour while attributes belong ing to the pile elements part concepts are shown in yellow colour See also SET GRAPHICS SIZE SYMBOLS SESAM Preframe Program version
123. UCT These two superelements may then be assembled using Presel As they are defined using the same origin there is no need for shifting or rotating them relatively to each other when assembling them How to model a conductor frame and use a set for copying it between elevations The GENERATE BEAM JACKET command optionally creates the nodes and elements of the conductors The conductor frame however is left for the user to model You may find it convenient to model the con ductor frame by the commands NODE RELATIVE EXTRAPOLATION INTERSECTION combined with the commands GENERATE BEAM LINE T BRACING and other commands for creating nodes and elements If the conductor frames of the various elevations are partly identical you may model the identical part only once and copy it to the other elevations as follows 1 Model one of the conductor frames e g the one at elevation 1 Model only the part that is identical with the other elevations 2 Define a set see the DEFINE SET command containing the conductor frame elements that are to be copied The set need not contain nodes as these will be copied if necessary when elements are copied Preframe SESAM 3 14 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 3 Copy the set see the COPY SET command Nodes and elements coinciding with existing nodes and elements will not be copied The copying is based on an increment in the node and element numbering this implies that a numbering system is required t
124. al displacement acceleration components for the translational and rotational d o f s Rotational d o f s are given in radians itx ity itz irx iry irz Imaginary displacement acceleration components for a complex load Rotational d o f s are given in radians ptx pty ptz prx pry prz The corresponding phase angle components in degrees The real components are treated as amplitudes SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 117 LOAD load case ROTATION OF STRUCTURE load case ROTATION OF STRUCTURE plx ply plz p2x p2y p2z ang vel ang acc PURPOSE The command defines an acceleration field composed of centripetal acceleration due to angular velocity and tangential acceleration due to angular acceleration about an arbitrary axis The direction of rotation is according to the right hand rule with respect to the direction point 1 Y point 2 the thumb points in this direction This direction of rotation has no consequence for the centripetal acceler ation angular velocity Note that the angular acceleration is a forced rotation and not a rotational acceleration field This means that the inertia forces due to the angular acceleration have the opposite direction of the direction of rotation This may be compared with giving the support points of a structure the acceleration g upwards instead of introducing an acceleration of gravity field acting downwards In both cases the in
125. al program Pro vided SESAM is properly installed on your computer Preframe is started by the command preframe in lower case The program responds by presenting itself and giving some key information e Program version number and release date date of executable file Access date and time now e Your user identification and other operating system and hardware related data Before you are allowed to continue i e start giving commands you must respond to the following requests for information e General file name prefix A character string forming a part of by preceding the names of the files opened by the program It may and may not include a directory specification e Model file name The name of the model file a binary data base file the command log journal file and other files opened by the program see Section 4 1 5 Old or new file Choose new when commencing modelling and old when continuing an earlier session i e the model file and command log file already exist Superelement type Or superelement number the identification or name of the superelement model to be created This question will not appear when answering old to the previous question 4 1 4 Line Mode Input of Commands and Arguments Having successfully entered Preframe as explained in Section 4 1 3 the command prompt appears the character The window in which you ar
126. al y x or z x plane is to be defined X GLOBAL INFINITY The local y x or z x plane is defined by the element axis and a guiding point X Y Z specifies a guiding point at an infinite distance along the positive negative global x y or z axis respectively X GLOBAL INFINITY See above Y GLOBAL INFINITY See above Y GLOBAL INFINITY See above Z GLOBAL INFINITY See above Z GLOBAL INFINITY See above GUIDING POINT Specifies that guiding point is to be defined by the user gx gy gz The vector pointing from end 1 of the element to the guiding point The vector is given in the global coordinate system See Figure 5 19 select elements Select elements see Figure 5 3 PLANE The local y x or z x plane is defined by a plane defined by three nodes see above for an explanation of the method SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 171 nodel node2 node3 The three nodes defining the plane Figure 5 19 shows the local coordinate system defined by a guiding point defining the local z x plane The local y axis is normal to the plane defined by the element axis and the guiding point Figure 5 20 shows the local coordinate system defined by using the PLANE option to define the local y x plane The local z axis is normal to the plane with a direction defined by a right hand rule and a positive rotation through the three nodes JQREDO PFQ SAH the vector from end 1 to the guiding point lt JREDO
127. am version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 77 PURPOSE The command creates all legs and the main bracings of a four six or eight legged jacket model The model may contain an arbitrary number of horizontal bracings elevations and it may also be given a top offset yielding a askew jacket This model may then be refined as required by creating additional bracings chang ing section assignments etc The origin of the coordinate system of the jacket will when seen from above be in the centre of the jacket The X axis will be in the length direction the Y axis in the width direction and the Z axis will point upwards The vertical position of the origin will indirectly be determined by the Z coordinate given for the bottom The principle of the command is e give the main dimensions like length width and Z coordinate of the bottom and top of the jacket e specify the elevations Z coordinates of the horizontal bracings e select additional bracing presently limited to X bracing by referring to row and elevation numbers e optionally define vertical conductors by giving their X and Y coordinates e assign section numbers to the various elevations of the legs bracings and conductors and e specify possible top offset of the jacket An exemplified guide in how to use this command is found in Section 3 2 4 The user is advised to refer to this section to learn about practical use of the command PARAMETERS 4 LEGGED Generate a four legged jacket
128. ameters which control the DISPLAY PLOT and LABEL commands PARAMETERS ALTERNATIVE SCREEN DEVICE BASIC ELEMENT MODE This option is presently not in use This option is presently not in use Preframe SESAM 5 212 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 SET GRAPHICS AUTO ON OFF AUTO PURPOSE The command involves that updates to the model will result in a refresh of the display with the updates included This is the default mode when the graphical user interface has been selected PARAMETERS ON Updates to the model will automatically be drawn OFF Option turned off SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 213 SET GRAPHICS CHARACTER TYPE SOFTWARE HARDWARE CHARACTER TYPE PURPOSE The command decides whether characters output on the graphic device are drawn SOFTWARE or device generated HARDWARE Device generated characters are much faster to produce but there may be restric tions on the character size and orientation By default characters are drawn SOFTWARE PARAMETERS SOFTWARE Drawn characters are used HARDWARE Device generated characters are used Preframe SESAM 5 214 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 SET GRAPHICS COLOUR BOUNDARY CONDITION WHITE ELEMENT NUMBERS GRAY DARK ELEMENTS BLACK LOAD ARROWS BLUE MATERIAL NUMBERS GREEN LIGHT COLOUR NODE NUMBERS ORANGE NODE SYMBOLS RED O
129. amples below indents are used merely to ease the readability while x y z xx etc represent coordi nate values that may be given as integer or real values The data entries may be given one by one i e hitting return between each entry or with several entries sep arated by one or more blanks as shown below a comma may also be used to separate entries However only one complete set of data e g one node with coordinates may be given on a single line Double dot will exit the current command while preserving complete sets of data First create the two single nodes 101 and 901 NODE 101 x y z 901 xx yy zZz Now create a line of nodes 201 401 601 801 between the two existing nodes 101 and 901 Note that the relative distances between the nodes are given i e not necessarily the absolute distances The program prompts and default values between slashes are shown in bold NODE LINE 101 901 NO OF DIVISIONS 2 5 4 NODE NUMBERS 201 401 601 801 5 SPACINGS EVEN 0 6 4 4 4 0 6 Create nodes 411 and 611 relative to the existing nodes 401 and 601 NODE RELATIVE 401 dx dy dz 411 601 dxx dyy dzz 611 Create node 506 at the intersection between the two lines 401 611 and 411 601 NODE INTERSECTION 401 611 411 601 506 Create node 11 extrapolated along a line between nodes 201 and 101 until the line hits a given XY plane i e a given value of the Z coordinate SESAM Program version 6 9
130. ands are described in the following The commands and sub commands are described in alphabetic order Below is a list of all main basic level commands SESAM 10 SEP 2004 Preframe 5 5 Program version 6 9 ADD DISPLAY ALIGN ASSIGN BOUNDARY HANGE O FU K yyaaaq a 9 a gt E 10 HR Y un T E E E Z D IK ERAT ELP NITIAL CONDITION LABEL EAR DEPENDENCY LOAD fASS ON NODI NODE PLOT PRINT CJ as e e E p fF O E td Z Tj E H Z CJ U ys O U E o H K Sas IZ e Fw E a TAT PLIT RANS FORMAT ION RITE SBHnnNDAAD D N Q O zZ Preframe SESAM 5 6 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 ADD DISPLAY LOAD load case load type ADD DISPLAY SOIL PROFILE soil id PURPOSE The command adds display of loads for a selected load case or adds display of soil profile PARAMETERS LOAD Add display of a selected load case If arrow presentation is selected the load is presented as arrows with their heads where the load applies The arrow lengths are proportional with the magnitude of the load The largest of the arrows will have a length on the display of approximate ly 15 mm this length may be adjusted by the SET GRAPHICS SIZE SYMBOLS LOAD ARROWS command The tails of the arrows are connected by dotted lines relevant for element distributed loads only Only th
131. ano fx fy fz mx my mz ifx ify ifz imx imy imz pfx pfy pfz pmx pmy pmz Load case number Select nodes see Section 5 1 Transformation reference number Real components of forces and moments Imaginary components of forces and moments for a complex load The corresponding phase angle components in degrees The real components are treated as amplitudes Preframe SESAM 5 116 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 LOAD load case NODE PRESCRIBED ACCELERATION DISPLACE MENT PRESCRIBED ACCELERATION load case NODE select nodes PRESCRIBED DISPLACEMENT GLOBAL tx ty tz rx ry rz TRANSFORMATION trano END IMAGINARY COMPLEX itx ity itz irx iry irz PHASE COMPLEX ptx pty ptz prx pry prz PURPOSE The command defines nodal prescribed displacements or accelerations for selected nodes The nodes must have been given the boundary condition code PRESCRIBED Alternatively to all six only selected d o f s may be given prescribed displacements accelerations The boundary condition code PRESCRIBED must then have been defined only for the relevant d o f s Note that even in this case a value must be entered for all six d o f s by giving the value 0 0 for the non prescribed d o f s PARAMETERS load case Load case number select nodes Select nodes see Section 5 1 trano Transformation reference number tx ty tz rx ry rz Re
132. aphical user interface The DISPLAY FOOTPRINT command is convenient in combination with the PROPERTY GAP command The use of the PROPERTY GAP command subsequent to a DISPLAY FOOTPRINT command is illustrated below Use of the graphical user interface see Section 3 1 is assumed here but the functionality is the same for line mode Having displayed the footprint of a joint a screen display as shown in Figure 3 12 appears A part of the chord is presented in developed view with the brace intersections shown The quadrilateral formed by the horizontal broken lines and the vertical solid lines represents the developed chord The node number as well as the chord element number and aligned element number are given in the upper right corner Preframe determines the chord and aligned elements based on the largest diameter of the tubes coming into the joint Upon giving the PROPERTY GAP command you are requested for joint node chord and aligned element You may enter the numbers by the keyboard or selected them by clicking the left mouse button on the num bers in the upper right corner of the screen as indicated in Figure 3 12 SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 3 23 Thereafter the legal gap should be given i e the minimum allowable gap between brace chord intersec tions Preframe suggests a value that you may accept by hitting Return or override by another value You may also change the suggested default value using the S
133. arame ters SHARY modified SHARY program Sfy SHARZ modified SHARZ program S Z POSITIVE Web location in the positive local y direction NEGATIVE Web location in the negative local y direction SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 185 AZ AZ TZ A IAS p hIY HZ ta ee y TZ E t BY Negative Positive Figure 5 23 Channel section Preframe SESAM 5 186 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 PROPERTY SECTION sctno DOUBLE BOTTOM sctno DOUBLE BOTTOM hz ty tb tt by sfy sfz PURPOSE The command defines a double bottom type cross section PARAMETERS sctno Section reference number hz Height ty Thickness of web tb Thickness of bottom plate tt Thickness of top plate by Effective width of plates sfy sfz Factors modifying the shear areas calculated by the program The modified shear areas are see the PRINT SECTION command for an explanation of the parame ters SHARY modified SHARY program Sy SHARZ modified SHARZ program S Z NOTES The user should use the double bottom section with care This is because the sectional properties are calcu lated in the same way as for the symmetrical I section Only the torsional moment of inertia is increased to take into account the shear flow along the top and bottom plates The effects in other directions are not con sidered The section may be used for estimating type
134. ases defined in Preframe topsup Top level superelement number Default 21 NOTES Always check the input file prior to running GENSOD SPLICE It may be necessary to manually modify the data e g the numvec variable due to seastate loads and load combinations in the SPLICE input tem plate Preframe is not able to read the top level superelement number given in Manager hence this must be speci fied due to the Matrix Interface File reference on the SPLICE input template The gravity loading factor ACCZ on the SPLICE input template is set equal to the gz parameter in gravity load case number 1 with opposite sign If not defined the value 1 0 is used The value of Z SCOUR on the SPLICE input template is set equal to the sum of ZSURF SCRLOC from the GENSOD input template The WRITE command is not logged on the journal file SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 247 ZOOM ZOOM IN OUT PURPOSE The command will in combination with manipulating the graphics cursor zoom in or out on the displayed picture How to use the mouse left mouse button to determine the zoom area may vary with the graphics device On most devices however you may either e press and hold while dragging to the opposite corner of a rectangle and then release or e click first in one corner and secondly in the opposite corner The zoom area is the smallest square containing the rectangle ZOOM IN will mag
135. at bottom Width at top Shear factor y direction Shear factor z direction Figure B 1 Bar section SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 B 3 B 1 1 2 Sectional Parameters Computed The expressions below for LX IY IZ WXMIN WYMIN WZMIN SHARY and SHARZ are taken from Ref 1 The expressions for SHCENY and SHCENZ are taken from Ref 3 B1 2 Box section B 1 2 1 Sectional Dimensions HZ Height BY Width TT Thickness of top flange TY Thickness of webs vertical walls TB Thickness of bottom flange SFY Shear factor y direction SFZ Shear factor z direction Figure B 2 Box section B 1 2 2 Sectional Parameters Computed The expressions below for LX IY IZ WXMIN WYMIN WZMIN SHARY SHARZ and SHCENY are taken from Ref 1 The expression for SHCENZ is taken from Ref 2 Preframe SESAM B 4 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 B1 3 Channel section B 1 3 1 Sectional Dimensions HZ Height BY Width of top and bottom flanges TZ Thickness of top and bottom flanges TY Thickness of web SFY Shear factor y direction SFZ Shear factor z direction POSWEB 1 for web location in positive y direction otherwise 1 A HZ BY Negative Positive Figure B 3 Channel section B 1 3 2 Sectional Parameters Computed The expressions below for LX IY IZ WXMIN WYMIN WZMIN SHARY and SHARZ are taken from Ref 1 The expressions for SHCENY and SHCENZ are taken from Ref 2 B1 4 Double bottom se
136. ate AUTO may also be given secno Section number to be used as stub strengthening name Name of member to be defined nodel Existing node defining start of member node2 Existing node defining end of member NOTES For the JOINT option the pipe section parameters must be given for each brace The default stub length is calculated according to given parameters see command SET CAN STUB LENGTH PARAMETERS and joint geometry If the pipe section parameters given do not correspond to an existing pipe section a new section will auto matically be created Elements belonging to a member may at any time be modified with respect to section and material by use of the command PROPERTY CONNECT See also CHANGE STUB SET CAN STUB LENGTH PARAMETERS PROPERTY CONNECT EXAMPLES ASSIGN STUB JOINT 5 Figure 5 2 Create stub sections by ASSIGN STUB SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 25 BOUNDARY FREE FIXED GLOBAL BOUNDARY PRESCRIBED 6 select nodes SUPER TRANSFORMATION trano fixcode PURPOSE The command defines boundary conditions for the degrees of freedom d o f s of the nodes PARAMETERS FREE Free to move FIXED Fixed at zero displacement PRESCRIBED With a prescribed displacement or acceleration to be given by the LOAD com mand SUPER Super d o f fixcode
137. button LMB to select command or action Graphic display area View Present Add display Pan Wirefram Align Rotate Silhouet Assign X axis Facetted Boundary Direct access Shortcut Command buttons commands menu last given input gt rr E o Line mode input Cursor position feedback prompt for information node and element numbers at cursor position shown here typed commands and data are echoed appear here Figure 3 2 The graphic mode window is composed of six different areas The six different areas of the graphic mode window are used as follows e Graphic display area The model is displayed here The display is automatically updated when new nodes and elements are defined unless this feature is on purpose switched off See Section 3 16 for some display examples Within several commands there is a need for selecting nodes or elements e g when boundary condi tions are defined and when loads are defined Alternatively to keying in the nodes and elements as explained in Section 5 1 you may select nodes and elements graphically There are three ways of doing this e Clicking the left mouse button LMB Dragging a rubber band rectangle using the LMB e Polygon selection Position the cursor and press the shift key to define the first polygon point While keeping the shift key pressed repeatedly move the cursor and click the LMB to make a pol ygon Releas
138. cate that these are defaults e Ifat least one of the arguments PREFIX NAME and STATUS is specified then the prompt for data base and journal file name is skipped and defaults are used for any unspecified values The values given to the EYEDIR are real values The default is the Preframe default values If one of the three are given the other two are set to 0 0 unless specified SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 4 9 e PLOT FORMAT POSTSCRIPT involves that Preframe plots use the POSTSCRIPT format Legal val ues are those presented in the SET PLOT FORMAT command PLOT FORMAT SESAM NEUTRAL is the default format e PLOT COLOUR ON is only available when PLOT FORMAT POSTSCRIPT or another format sup porting colours have been specified Default is PLOT COLOUR OFF e PLOT PAGE SIZE is ignored if the plot format is SESAM NEUTRAL The default is PLOT PAGE SIZE A4 e PLOT ORIENTATION PORTRAIT is the default orientation The argument is available only for for mats supporting different orientations 4 2 Program Requirements 4 2 1 Execution Time The execution time required is negligible for most commands A few commands however will require some CPU and should be used with care on low capacity computers An example of such is the PROPERTY GAP command 4 2 2 Storage Space The initial size of the data base prior to any modelling is less than 1 MB 5 MB will be sufficient for most models 4 3 Program Limitat
139. ction B 1 4 1 Sectional Dimensions HZ Height SESAM Preframe Program version6 9 MEP BS TY Thickness of web TB Thickness of bottom plate TT Thickness of top plate BY Effective width of plates SFY Shear factor y direction SFZ Shear factor z direction Figure B 4 Double bottom section B 1 4 2 Sectional Parameters Computed The calculation procedure for the double bottom section is the same as for the I section for computation of all parameters except ZX and WXMIN In the formulae below ZXI is the ZX for the I section B1 5 I or H section B 1 5 1 Sectional Dimensions HZ Height BT Width of top flange TT Thickness of top flange TY Thickness of web BB Width of bottom flange Preframe SESAM B 6 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 TB Thickness of bottom flange SFY Shear factor y direction SFZ Shear factor z direction Figure B 5 I or H section B 1 5 2 Sectional Parameters Computed The expressions below for LX IY IZ WXMIN WYMIN WZMIN SHARY SHARZ and SHCENY are taken from Ref 1 The expression for SHCENZ is taken from Ref 2 B1 6 L section B 1 6 1 Sectional Dimensions HZ Height TY Thickness of web BY Width of flange TZ Thickness of flange SFY Shear factor y direction SFZ Shear factor z direction POSWEB for web location in positive y direction otherwise 1 SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 B 7 shear centre Negative Positive Figure B 6 L
140. d Loads are defined by the LOAD command and should be given consecutive load case numbers 1 2 3 or else computation time will be spent in the analysis program solving zero load cases The following types of loads may be given e element load e nodal load e gravity e rotation of structure For more information see the LOAD command Note Element loads are removed when elements are modified by the ASSIGN and SPLIT com mands i e loads element loads are applied to elements which by these commands are being deleted Hence complete the modelling prior to defining load cases including element loads By use of the command LOAD load case ELEMENT LINE LOAD nodel1 node 2 element dis tributed loads will be created on all elements between the two given nodes 3 16 Display Features See Section 4 1 4 for general information on requirements to the graphics environment There are numerous features for displaying the model The relevant commands are explained in the follow ing DISPLAY displays the model Its subcommands are NODE displays the nodes and elements see Figure 3 17 ELEMENT displays the elements only i e without nodes see Figure 3 18 e JOINT displays a joint with all elements chord and braces meeting there the elements are displayed in facet draw mode together with the intersection curves between them the current eccentricities are accounted for see Figure 3 19 In graphical user in
141. d Note Introducing eccentricities for an element for which a local coordinate system has previously been defined using the PROPERTY LOCAL COORDINATE command see Section 3 3 3 will lead to error if the eccentricity involves changing the direction of the local x axis This is because the y and z axes have been determined by the PROPERTY LOCAL COORDINATE command and changing the x axis will then give a non cartesian coordinate system Printing the local coordinate system for the element will reveal this by a remark ERR O in the right hand column of the table When an element with eccentricities is subjected to a point load or distributed load the user may choose how to apply the load by the SET ELEMENT LOAD DISTANCE MODE command see this 3 3 2 Hinge Hinges may be defined for beam and non structural beam elements This is a generalised hinge in that any of the six d o f s may individually be defined as hinges The hinge may even have a certain resistance or a spring attached This may be given as a value in between 0 and 1 where 0 implies fully released hinge with no resistance and 1 implies fully connected no hinge Hinges are assigned to the two ends of the beam elements individually A hinge is the beam end s degree of connection to the node Figure 3 7 is an illustration of a beam with a translational hinge in local x direction in one end and a rotational hinge in the other end Note that other elements coming into the nodes a
142. d ingly change the load If required use PROPERTY LOCAL COORDINATE prior to the load definition Preframe 5 114 10 SEP 2004 LOAD load case GRAVITY load GRAVITY pi oad case NO gx gy gz PURPOSE SESAM Program version 6 9 The command defines the acceleration of gravity used by the analysis program to compute the weight of elements and nodal masses PARAMETERS load case YES NO 8X 8y 8Z Load case number Answer yes to question Weight contribution from flexible part of elements only This option has significance only if eccentricities offsets are defined Answer no to question above Possible eccentricities are neglected and the con tribution to the weight is for each element based on the distance between the two nodes Components of acceleration of gravity in the directions of the global axes An ac celeration of gravity will yield a gravity force in the same direction as the acceler ation SESAM Program version 6 9 Preframe 10 SEP 2004 5 115 LOAD load case NODE FORCE load case NODE FORCE select nodes GLOBAL fx Ify fz mx my mz TRANSFORMATION trano END IMAGINARY COMPLEX ifx ify ifz imx imy imz PHASE COMPLEX pfx pfy pfz pmx pmy pmz PURPOSE The command defines nodal forces and moments PARAMETERS load case select nodes tr
143. d Information related to the pile concepts geomery and attributes are written to the SESAM Input Interface File and the pile data are read by the non linear pile soil interaction analysis program Splice Modelling of piles in Preframe implies that use of the pile data gen eration program Pilgen is not necessary prior to running Splice Pile definitions and soil data together forms the basis for Preframe to write an input file template to the Splice analysis The data given with respect to the soil profile may be used as basis for generation of piles i e the piles will be generated to match the soil layers Based on the soil data Preframe writes an input file template to be used by the soil stiffness calculation program Gensod SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 3 27 The pile elements are part of the first level superelement and hence may be handled in the postprocessing program Framework e g print display of element forces print of stresses display of shape yield code check of the pipe elements etc For example see Appendix A 3 a A O 45 0 Figure 3 14 Model of single pile showing soil profile and Z level for each soil type Data definitions describing the soil profile and data types exist for e soil types e soil profile with respect to soil types and layer divisions e skin friction and tip resistance data PY TZ and QZ codes Preframe SESAM 3 28 10 SEP 200
144. d the elements selected are part of an X brace then the elements will no longer be on a straight line To align the elements use the command CHANGE NODE node where node is a node at the end of any chain of aligned elements and the semicolon indicates that existing X Y and Z co ordinates shall be used This command will actually align all chains of aligned elements independent of location in the model See also SET ALIGNMENT AUTOMATIC SESAM Program version 6 9 ASSIGN 10 SEP 2004 CAN CONE HYDRODYNAMIC PILE DATA ASSIGN SEGMENT sub commands SOIL DATA STABILITY STUB PURPOSE The command is used to modify structural joints and to add conceptual attributes PARAMETERS CAN CONE HYDRODYNAMIC PILE DATA SEGMENT SOIL DATA STABILITY STUB Add joint chord strengthening Add a conical transition to a member Add hydrodynamic attributes to member Add pile attributes to piles Add a new segment to member Add soil data to the soil profile Add stability attributes to member Add joint brace strengthening The sub commands and data are fully explained on the following pages Preframe 5 9 Preframe 5 10 10 SEP 2004 ASSIGN CAN CHORD node element CAN dy thk sfy sfz length JOINT node or if the SET ASSIGN OPTION MANUAL NUMBERING is switched ON SESAM Program version 6 9
145. d then the local coordinate system may become erroneous the local x axis may change while the local y and z axes are fixed This may also happen when introducing eccentricities by the PROPERTY Preframe SESAM 5 170 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 ECCENTRICITY or PROPERTY GAP commands In such cases the local coordinate system must be rede fined by the user Elements for which a local coordinate system is not explicitly defined will have a program calculated default local coordinate system The default local coordinate system is so that the local z x plane is either parallel to the global y axis or the global z axis depending on whether the element itself is parallel with the global z axis or not The calculated default local coordinate system has the same effect as giving the command PROPERTY LOCAL COORDINATE ZX PLANE Z GLOBAL INFINITY for all elements not parallel with the global z axis and giving the command PROPERTY LOCAL COORDINATE ZX PLANE Y GLOBAL INFINITY for all elements parallel with the global z axis The local coordinate systems of the elements are printed by the PRINT LOCAL COORDINATE command and displayed by the LABEL LOCAL COORDINATE command The last column of the print table giving the local coordinate systems for the different elements indicates whether the local coordinate systems are specified SPEC or calculated CALC PARAMETERS YX PLANE ZX PLANE Specifies whether the loc
146. d by load type secondar ily by load case and thirdly by node element number SESAM Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 PRINT LOAD OVERVIEW GENERAL load case INERTIA ALL LOADCASES OVERVIEW NODE ELEMENT END END PURPOSE Preframe 5 139 The command prints a selected load overview table The tables have the following appearances Example of general load overview SUPER ELEMENT TYPE 1 LEVEL 1 NUMBER OF LOADS LOADCASE INERTIA NODAL ELEMENTAI 2 1 1 6 5 10 7 Example of inertia load overview SUPER ELEMENT TYPE 1 LEVEL 1 NUMBER OF INERTIA LOADS LOADCASE GRAVITY ROT ACC 2 1 5 Example of node load overview SUPER ELEMENT TYPE 1 LEVEI 1 NUMBER OF NODAL LOADS FORCES PRESCR PRESCR ROT TEMP LOADCASE MOMENTS DISPL ACC ACC TEMP 1 DERIV 2 dl 5 6 2 2 Example of element load overview SUPER ELEMENT TYPE 1 LEVEL 1 NUMBER O F ELEMENTAL LOAD DISTRIB POINT ON UNI FORI UNI FORI TEMPE LOADCASE BEAM BEAM LINE SURFACE VOLUME RATURI 2 6 Preframe SESAM 5 140 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 PRINT LOAD SUM YES load case SUM ALL LOADCASES NO END PURPOSE The command prints load sum tables Either the sum of positive and negative values sepa
147. d d o f s 0 blank free 1 FIXED fixed at zero displacement 2 PRESC prescribed displacement 3 LINEAR linearly dependent of some other d o f s 4 SUPER super d o f 100 SUPERL super d o f due to linear dependency SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 149 PARAMETERS select nodes Select nodes see Section 5 1 Preframe SESAM 5 150 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 PRINT NODE COORDINATES COORDINATES select nodes PURPOSE The command prints a table of the coordinates of the nodes The table also indicates whether boundary con ditions have been defined for the nodes and gives the number of d o f s of the nodes The table has the fol lowing appearance SUPER ELEMENT TYPE 1 LEVEL 1 EXT INT COORDINATES BOU NO NO X Y Z CON ND 101 1 20 000000 20 000000 0 000000 X 6 104 22 20 000000 20 000000 0 000000 X 6 105 2 20 000000 20 000000 0 000000 X 6 108 2 20 000000 20 000000 0 000000 6 201 5 19 459459 19 459459 5 405406 6 202 41 19 459461 0 000006 5 405409 6 705 4 10 000000 10 000000 100 000000 X 6 706 39 0 000000 10 000002 100 000000 3 707 5 10 000000 0 000000 100 000000 X 3 708 23 10 000000 10 000000 100 000000 X 6 The columns of the table give from left to right user defined external node number internal node number initially the first node created is number 1 the
148. d to the number of d o f s of the nodes of the relevant general spring elements The matrix values are given in the local coordinate system of the general spring element PARAMETERS matno Material reference number ndofl Number of d o f s in local node 1 ndof2 Number of d o f s in local node 2 ky 1 Ko 1 Kndotndof The elements of the lower triangle of the stiffness matrix given column by column The elements outside the diagonal will have default value 0 0 ndof ndofl ndof2 NOTES Note that the off diagonal elements idof ndofl idof corresponding to the translational d o f s idof is a translational d o f should be given a negative value when defining a complete diagonal general spring matrix with same number of d o f s in each node Kidofndofl tidof Kidofidof Kndofi idofndofl idof SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 177 PROPERTY MATERIAL matno LINEAR ELASTIC matno LINEAR ELASTIC young poiss rho damp alpha PURPOSE The command defines a linear elastic material type relevant for beam truss and non structural beam ele ments PARAMETERS matno Material reference number young Young s modulus poiss Poisson s ratio rho Density damp Specific damping alpha Thermal expansion coefficient Preframe SESAM 5 178 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 PROPERTY MATERIAL matno SHIM MEMBER matno SHIM MEMBER ndofl ndof2 trans stiff
149. dency involves using the superelement technique also see Section 3 9 The only exception from the above Note is if the option SET LINEAR DEPENDENCY MODE NO FORCE TO SUPER is used It is then possible to use linear dependency between nodes without use of super nodes i e without use of the super elements technique This option is only available when using the multifront equation solver in Sestra Linear dependencies in a transformed coordinate system may be specified by first assigning a transforma tion to the dependent and independent nodes using the BOUNDARY command 3 13 Nodal Mass The MASS ON NODE command allows concentrated masses a diagonal mass matrix to be defined for selected nodes Note that the weight of nodal masses will contribute in a gravity load case in a static analy sis 3 14 Transformation Transformations are defined by the TRANSFORMATION command and are used for the following pur poses e to introduce rotated coordinate systems in nodes for the purpose of defining boundary conditions not coinciding with the global axes e g fixed in a certain direction and free in the two perpendicular direc tions Preframe SESAM 3 32 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 e to define the local coordinate systems of elements with no extent e g spring to ground elements e to define loads in coordinate systems other than the global the model s coordinate system to rotate groups of nodes see Section 3 10 1 3 15 Loa
150. dies 5 167 PROPERTY LOCAL COORDINATE occcoococcccnconcnononnnnnononcnononanecononnnccnnaneconnnnononnanonronnnanrcnananinnna 5 169 PROPERTY MATERTAD a tatiana 5 173 PROPERTY MATERIAL matno AXIAL DAMPER AXIAL SPRING ooononoccncccnnnnnnnnnccnnnannos 5 174 PROPERTY MATERIAL matno DAMPER TO GROUND ooccccncnonononnnnnnnononononononoccncncccncncnnnss 5 175 PROPERTY MATERIAL matno GENERAL SPRING coooccccncncnononononononcnnnnnnnnnonononononononecononanonos 5 176 PROPERTY MATERIAL matno LINEAR ELASTIC ococccnncnninincnnnnnnananonanoncnnncnonononononecccicnanoss 5 177 PROPERTY MATERIAL matno SHIM MEMBER ococccccccncnononanananananononnnnnnononononecococanicininininos 5 178 PROPERTY MATERIAL matno SPRING TO GROUND conccnncncncnonononcnnnnnnnnnnnonononocccononancncninss 5 179 PROPERTY SECTION suit E io iii 5 180 PROPERTY SECTION sctno BAR ooccccccnnoncccconnnnconanonononnoconnanocononnnnronano ccoo no nrnnnnonr ona nnnrcnananonnna 5 182 PROPERTY SECTION sctno BOX eire aiea aiea Aara RAEAN AEEA AEAEE EAA KA ERANA EINA ERATARA 5 183 PROPERTY SECTION sctno CHANNEL cooooocccccnnnncnnnnonononnannnonononananonononononnnonnnnnononnnnnanoncononanos 5 184 PROPERTY SECTION sctno DOUBLE BOTTOM oincccoconccnonancnononnnnnonancnccnnnoncnnnonronnnnnrcnonnncnnn 5 186 PROPERTY SECTION sctno GENERA Dinaan a E T E E a 5 188 PROPERTY SEC TION Sc it a eA oa E EAEE AEAEE 5 190 PROPERTY SECTION Scttio Es iia ia iia Toe Se lochs 5 192 PROPERTY SECTION sctno PIPE rarior Ta necia
151. duced to the given gap value For examples of the resulting element eccentricities after use of the CHANGE JOINT node select GAP PLANEWISE see Appendix A 3 See also SET CAN STUB LENGTH PARAMETERS SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 33 CHANGE LINEAR DEPENDENCY LINEAR DEPENDENCY dep node dep dof indep node indep dof beta PURPOSE The command changes linear dependencies between nodes Only the linear dependency factor beta may be changed The linear dependency may originally have been defined by either the GENERAL NODE DEPENDENCY or the TWO NODE DEPENDENCY option see the LINEAR DEPENDENCY com mand PARAMETERS dep node Node number previously defined as dependent dep dof D o f previously defined as dependent of the indep dof of the indep node choose either X Translation in x direction Y Translation in y direction Z Translation in z direction R X Rotation about the x direction R Y Rotation about the y direction R Z Rotation about the z direction indep node Node number previously defined as independent indep dof D o f previously defined as independent choose either X Translation in x direction Y Translation in y direction Z Translation in z direction R X Rotation about the x direction R Y Rotation about the y direction R Z Rotation about the z direction beta New linear dependency factor
152. e secondarily by load case and thirdly by node element number The tables have the following appear ances Example of gravity load LOADCAS CONTRIBUTION GRAVITY Example of rotatio T E FROM COMPLETE ELEMENT TX TY TZ n of structure load LOADCAS ROTATION OF ST AXIS POS P1 AXIS POS P2 AXIS DIR ANGULAR VELOC ANGULAR ACCEL T E RUCTURE X1 Y1 21 20 0000 20 0000 X2 12 A2 10 0000 10 0000 DX DY DZ 0 0990 0 0990 ITY RAD E RAD Example of node force loads LOADCAS NODE INDEX FORCE MOMENT NODE INDEX FORCE MOMENT Z El T E LOADCASE 70 1 1 TXTY TZ lt 33 0000 44 0000 RX RY RZ 77 0000 88 0000 LOADCASE 701 2 TX TY TZ 1 0000 2 0000 RX RY RZ 4 0000 5 0000 TX TY TZ 7 0000 8 0000 RX RY RZ 1 0000 Example of node prescribed displacement acceleration loads LOADCAS T E 9 8100 100 0000 0 9901 10 0000 5 5 000 REAL 000 REAL 5 000 REAL 000 REAL 000 IMAG 00 IMAG Preframe 5 142 NOD INDE PRE DISPL Gl NODE INDE PRE ACC Example of element distributed loads X LOADCAS X LOADCASE E TX TY TZ RX RY RZ TX TY TZ RX RY RZ LOADCAS DISTANCE FRO ELEMENT INDEX ea LOADCAS El E2 TX TY TZ TX TY TZ LOADCAS El E2 TX TY TZ TX TY TZ TX TY TZ TX
153. e now working is called the line mode window You may switch to the graphical user interface explained in Section 3 1 by the line mode command SET GRAPHICS INPUT ON or you may continue working in the line mode window displaying the model will then open a display window The information below is about entering line mode commands Note that line mode commands may also be entered in the graphic mode window The information below is with a few exceptions therefore also rele vant for the graphical user interface The syntax and characteristics of line mode input are as follows e The parameters commands sub commands and data are separated by one or more blank characters or a comma and may be entered one by one or with two or more entries on a single line of input For exam ple Preframe SESAM 4 4 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 COMMAND SUB COMMAND SUB SUB COMMAND data is equivalent to COMMAND SUB COMMAND SUB SUB COMMAND data Note however that data belonging to different data sets cannot be entered on a single line e UPPER CASE lower case all commands will be logged on a command log file in UPPER case e Commands and sub commands may be abbreviated as long as they are unique In a command consisting of words separated by hyphens each word may be abbreviated or completely left out Examples NODE NUMBERS N N COMMAND INPUT FILE C I e Default values are provided between slashes default
154. e part of the load related to the currently displayed elements will be added The positions of the arrows are adjusted for shrunken elements and beam eccen tricities load case Load case to add If a load case contains several load types node force element distributed etc then only one of the load types may be added at a time load type Type of load to add See the LOAD command for the different types of loads SOIL PROFILE Add to display nodes and elements representing the soil profile soil id The soil profile id number to be used Currently only id 1 allowed NOTES The SET GRAPHICS PRESENTATION LOAD command controls how to present the load Use the ADD LOAD command prior e g zooming in or adding element or node numbers Nodes and elements generated to represent the soil profile will be assigned node and element numbers start ing with 800000 The command may be activated for soil id 1 by the button Soil On under Display in the graphical user interface quick button area The soil profile will automatically be delete prior to writing the SESAM Interface File FEM The soil profile will automatically deleted after modification of the soil profile data SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 7 On the display the nodes defining the soil division types are drawn in blue equal to supernodes while nodes defining internal layers are drawn in yellow equal to ordinary nodes The soil profile is by defaul
155. e tabulated It is not possible to change existing elements or loads although nodal positions can be changed Further new nodes elements beams trusses cables etc and loads can be added to the model SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 3 1 3 USER S GUIDE TO PREFRAME This user s guide explains how to Get started using the graphical user interface See Section 3 1 Create nodes and elements See Section 3 2 Define properties See Section 3 3 Align elements See Section 3 4 Create members See Section 3 5 Model tubular joints cans stubs cones and gaps See Section 3 6 Assign hydrodynamic and stability data See Section 3 7 Model soil and piles See Section 3 8 Define boundary conditions See Section 3 9 Change data See Section 3 10 Copy data See Section 3 11 Define linear dependencies See Section 3 12 Define nodal masses See Section 3 13 Define transformations to be used for defining boundary conditions loads etc See Section 3 14 Define loads See Section 3 15 Display and print data See Section 3 16 and Section 3 17 Preframe SESAM 3 2 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 3 1 Getting Started the Graphical User Interface Preframe is started from the SESAM Manager by clicking Model Frame Preframe See Section 4 1 3 for how to start Preframe outside Manager Unix only The main part of the graphical user interface is the graphic mode window The appearance of this wind
156. e the shift key and click to define the last polygon point A straight line between the first and last polygon points closes the polygon If the LMB is pressed rather than clicked a rub berband line appears as an aid to determine the position of the polygon segment Preframe SESAM 3 4 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 The availability of graphical selection is subject to that node element selection has been switched on by the Direct access buttons Node and Element By default they are both switched on depressed See information on these buttons below Note that if the Direct access button Info is depressed then nodes and elements cannot be selected by clicking See information on the Info button below Command menu The at any time allowable commands plus default values for numerical data are listed here as buttons Commands and values are selected by clicking the left mouse button LMB Slanted text signifies default choices that are accepted by either e Hitting the Return key e Clicking either of the Direct access buttons semicolon and double slash The former accepts all subsequent default values see Section 4 1 4 while the latter accepts a single default value i e the one shown in slanted font e Shortcut commands These provide one click access to commonly used compound commands A Shortcut command is logged as its equivalent full standard commands The Shortcut commands are sorted in six grou
157. e then interpreted in the model s global coordinate system The effect of this procedure will in the illustrated example be that the nodes are rotated in the direction from the transformed coordinate system towards the global coordinate system GT gt Yr gt Yo initial position new position Xo Xy P Figure 3 15 Changing node positions by CHANGE NODE ROTATE 3 10 2 Change Load to Mass Dead weights may have been modelled as vertical forces in negative z direction for a static analysis If a dynamic analysis is to be performed these must be converted to nodal masses Preframe offers a command for this purpose the CHANGE LOAD load case TO MASSES command Preframe SESAM 3 30 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 Within the command reference is made to a gravity load case The transformation of forces to masses is per formed by dividing the forces by the acceleration of gravity taken from the referred gravity load case Unless the forces and the acceleration of gravity are parallel and with the same sign normally both will be in negative z direction the command will refuse to change the loads into masses Note that the weight of nodal masses see Section 3 13 will contribute in a gravity load case in a static anal ysis Dead weights may therefore be modelled as masses rather than nodal forces thereby letting them con tribute to both static and dynamic analyses 3 11 Copy Data The COPY command may copy either a line
158. ecuting the old command input file it is strongly recom mended to switch to the new numbering routines by the command SET NUMBERING AUTOMATIC NEW SYSTEM END Note When the command SET NUMBERING AUTOMATIC ON is given as input the system logs SET NUMBERING AUTOMATIC OFF on the journal file and AUTO is used to replace the node and element numbers when more than one number is required Preframe SESAM 5 228 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 SET PLOT ON OFF FILE file prefix file name COLOUR number SESAM NEUTRAL POSTSCRIPT HPGL 7550 HPGL 2 PLOT CGM BINARY LANDSCAPE PORTRAIT Al A2 A3 A4 A5 US letter FORMAT ORIENTATION PAGE SIZE PURPOSE The command sets parameters for plotting The settings must be done prior to giving the PLOT command PARAMETERS FILE Set file prefix and name for the plot file Default is the same as for the model file The file extension depends on the type of format FORMAT Set the plot format number The plotter number may alternatively be given but you will normally not know this SESAM NEUTRAL A plot format of the SESAM system This is the default format File extension is PLO POSTSCRIPT The PostScript plot format File extension is PS HPGL 7550 A Hewlett Packard plot format File extension is HP70 SESAM Preframe 10 SEP 2004 5 229 Program version 6 9 HPGL 2 CGM BINARY COLOU
159. eframe REFERENCES 1
160. el at bottom of soil type i ESE CRE i i SAND 5 i i Y 38 5 M M Y SAND 5 a Z X Y 45 0 Figure A 6 Soil profile and piles view in X direction Example of Gensod and Splice templates from above example GENSOD INP ENSOD Project OPENED BY PREFRAME 25 SEP 2001 09 00 34 WARNING This file is a template Tt MUST be checked before GENSOD is executed GI C Cc E C Cc C C C Preframe SESAM A 16 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 KKK KK KK KK KK KK KKKEK CONTROL SECTION 1 000 CONFRC OLD FORCE UNIT CONFRC NEW FORCE UNIT 1MN 1000 1KN 1 000 CONLTH OLD LENGTH UNIT CONLTH NEW LENGTH UNIT 1 3 28 1FT 5 NUMTYP NUMBER OF DIFFERENT SOIL TYPES 13 NUMTOZ NUMBER OF LINES IN THE T Z Q Z DATA TABLE BELOW 15 NUMLAY NUMBER OF SOIL LAYERS 0 NUMDSP NUMBER OF Z LEVELS WITH GIVEN SOIL DISPLACEMENTS 1 MIDBOT P Y ETC COMPUTED AT 1 LAYER MIDPOINT 2 LAYER BOTTO 9 81 GAMMAW UNIT WEIGHT OF WATER 9 81 KN M3 IN SI UNITS 101 30 ATMPRS ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE 101 3 KN M2 IN SI UNITS 1 50 ZCYCL Z LEVEL DOWN TO WHICH CYCLIC P Y DATA SHALL BE GENERATED 101 00 SUSTIF USE STIFF CLAY P Y PROCEDURES IF SU GT SUSTF API ONLY 2 JPRINT PRINTED OUTPUT DATA 0 NONE 1 SOME 2 FULL 1 JECHO ECHO PRINT OF INPUT
161. element s local coordinate system FIXATION CONNECTIVITY Coefficients of fixation connectivity are to be given Preframe SESAM 5 168 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 alpha The coefficient of fixation a of the i th d o f INTERELEMENT ELASTIC SPRING STIFFNESS Inter element elastic spring stiffnesses are to be given Cj Inter element elastic spring stiffness c of the i th d o f INFINITY Inter element elastic spring stiffness of the i th d o f is given an infinitely high value SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 169 PROPERTY LOCAL COORDINATE YX PLANE ZX PLANE LOCAL COORDINATE X GLOBAL INFINITY X GLOBAL INFINITY Y GLOBAL INFINITY Y GLOBAL INFINITY select elements Z GLOBAL INFINITY Z GLOBAL INFINITY GUIDING POINT gx gy gz PLANE nodel node2 node3 PURPOSE The command defines local coordinate systems for elements The command may be repeated to override previous definitions Local coordinate systems cannot be deleted or changed All beam and non structural beam elements will have local coordinate systems whether they are implicitly defined calculated by the program or explicitly defined by the PROPERTY LOCAL COORDINATE command The local x axis is by definition the neutral axis of the cross section and pointing from beam end 1 towards beam end 2 Beam ends 1 and 2 are implicitly defined when creating the elem
162. element beam numbering you may give the command SET NUMBERING AUTOMATIC ON You will then not be prompted for node and element numbers Note however that the log will contain the command SET NUMBERING AUTOMATIC OFF and either AUTO or specific values for node and element numbers Preframe SESAM A 2 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 I or H sections box sections Figure A 1 A module frame First model the cellar deck Using the NODE command define the node at position cellar deck and intersection between axes A and 2 i e a node in the origin and the node at position cellar deck A 4 28 0 0 Generate a line of nodes and elements between the two nodes There should be 7 divisions beam ele ments along the line with a spacing as given in Figure A 2 GENERATE BEAM LINE click Ist node click 2nd mode 7 give spacings Rather than entering GENERATE BEAM LINE you may click button Generate Line Define a set containing all nodes and elements created so far DEFINE SET set name UNION WITH NODE ALL UNION WITH ELEMENT ALL END Copy the defined set a distance 11 in Y direction to create axis B in cellar deck COPY SET set name 0 11 0 Copy the defined set a distance 22 in Y direction to create axis C in cellar deck Note that this command will stop and give a warning numbering failed give new increment The reason for this is Since we have requested automatic numberi
163. ely Default switches back to the default viewing position optionally set in Manager and re dis plays the model Zoom In zooms in by either clicking twice and diagonally or by pressing the LMB and drag ging it to form a zoom area rubber band box Zoom Fr re displays the model so that it fits within the display area Refresh refreshes the display with the last setting Misc Learn offers making a new Shortcut command Click the button and enter a maximum eight character string being the name of the new Shortcut command and hit Return Now give any sequence of commands Several complete commands may be given the last of which may be incomplete i e more data is required to make it complete Clicking the learn button once more completes the process and the new Shortcut command appears as a new button Preframe SESAM 3 6 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 Info offers quick information on nodes and elements When clicked depressed the program enters into an info mode involving that clicking nodes and elements provides information coordi nates etc on the clicked items The information appears in the print window line mode window on Unix Note that when in info mode nodes and elements cannot be selected by clicking drag ging rubberband still functions as selection though Click the button once more lift it to leave info mode Combined with pushing the Shift key this function will give you distance
164. ember are automatically assigned the alignment attribute I e if a node in one end of a member moves then all intermediate nodes will be moved to keep the elements forming the mem ber on a straight line Also if the first or last element segment in a member is given an eccentricity then all intermediate elements will be applied with necessary eccentricities to keep the elements on a straight line See also the command SET ALIGNMENT AUTOMATIC When set to ON elements created by the GEN ERATE command i e jacket structure line of elements T brace K brace and X brace and the SPLIT command will automatically be assigned alignment attributes Information related to the members is written to the SESAM Input Interface File and the information is used by Wajac and Framework 3 6 Tubular Joint Modelling 3 6 1 Assign joint strengthening Define joint strengthening sections cans stubs by use of the command ASSIGN CAN and ASSIGN STUB The ASSIGN command assigns updates members with new elements Additional elements are added to a member in order to represent a can or stub section at one end of the member Adding an element in this con nection actually means splitting an existing element This operation presumes that the element to be modi fied is part of a member and if not the user is guided through the process of creating a member after other necessary input has been given The default can and stub lengths for tubular joints are ca
165. en L B J 6 301122 CODE BFKy 0 8000 BFKz 0 8000 CODE BLy 0 1200E 02 BLz 0 1300E 02 Example of print pile data SUPER ELEMENT TYPE 1 LEVEI 1 CONCEPT ATTRIBUTES NO NAME Type Attrib Value Attrib Value Attrib Value 43 P71 PILE Pipcod T ATER Fy 0 3450E 09 51 P11 PILE Fix to 100 PILE Pipcod l MATER Fy 0 3450E 09 55 SECT EA new 0 1111E 04 El new 0 2222E 04 GA new 0 3333E 04 GT new 0 4444E 04 58 P81 PILE Fix to 100 PILE Tipcod 1 MATER Fy 0 3450E 09 62 SECT EA new 0 1111E 04 El new 0 2222E 04 GA new 0 3333E 04 GT new 0 4444E 04 SESAM Program version 6 9 PARAMETERS HYDRODYNAMIC STABILITY PILE DATA NOTES See also LABEL CONCEPT ATTRIBUTES Preframe 10 SEP 2004 5 133 Print hydrodynamic attributes assigned to concepts Print stability parameters assigned to concepts Print pile parameters assigned to concepts Preframe SESAM 5 134 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 PRINT DATA CHECK BEAM ELEMENTS DATA CHECK NODES PURPOSE The command prints check data for verification of the model PARAMETERS BEAM ELEMENTS Print a list of beam elements with missing material and or cross section properties NODES Print a list of nodes not connected to any elements SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 135 PRINT ECCENTRICITY ECCENTRICITY select elements PURPOS
166. en accepted Do not read a command input file Force EXIT after initialisation and after processing of the file defined by the COMMAND FILE argument Disable FORCED EXIT Set initial eye direction X value Set initial eye direction Y value Set initial eye direction Z value Set the default plot format to the specified format Switch colours for plot file on or off Set the default plot page size Set the default plot orientation Set the form feed page break character to either ASCII char acter 12 format ASCII or to the FORTRAN standard of 1 in the first column format FORTRAN ASCII format is default and will give proper page breaks when printing on laser printers and when importing into word processors Set the size of the graphical user interface window or graphic display window This is available on Unix only The value to give is percentage of screen height By default size 90 Note the following about how to enter command line arguments Command line arguments and values can be abbreviated Each argument name must begin with a slash and each argument value must be preceded by an equal sign Spaces can freely be distributed around the equal sign and before each slash e Texts with blank spaces and special characters e g file names must be enclosed in quotes Note that some operating systems change the case of the input text if it is not enclosed in quotes Slanted arguments or values indi
167. ent Use LABEL LOCAL COORDINATE to see which end is end 1 the local y or z axis according to your choice is drawn close to end 1 Note that the SET NUMBERING AUTOMATIC command may be used to switch on automatic assignment of node and element numbers The command will then not request node and element numbers An eccentricity of the element to split has the effect that T bracing is not perpendicular to the split element EHRUH OWJ WHQY ORGHIVSRVOIRQHG RQ WH HEFEOMIF HDP HOWWH7 EUHQ Z1 not EHSHSHIGFXDUN WH WOWEDP HW Figure 5 9 T bracing when eccentricity EXAMPLES Example of command for generating a T bracing GENERATE BEAM BEAS T BRACING 151 10 105 11 15 END END EHRUH Figure 5 10 T bracing created by GENERATE command Preframe 5 92 GENERATE eltyp X BRACING 10 SEP 2004 X BRACING nodel node2 node3 node4 nodeno elno 4 STEP first element element step AUTO PURPOSE SESAM Program version 6 9 The command creates an X bracing between four existing nodes by creating a new node nodeno at the point of intersection between two straight lines defined by nodel node2 and node3 node4 and creating four new elements in the following sequence element 1 from nodel to nodeno element 2 from nodeno to node2 element 3 from node3 to nodeno element 4 from nodeno to node4 See Fi
168. ent end 1 is the first node given when creating the element The local y z plane is normal to the local x axis and defining a local coordinate system involves determining the orientation of the local y and z axes The orientation of the local y and z axis is defined by either determining the orientation of the y x plane or the z x plane The orientation of either of these planes is defined by either of the following two methods e A guiding point given in terms of coordinates option GUIDING POINT or as a point infinitely far away along any of the global axes either in positive or negative direction This guiding point determines the orientation of the local y x or z x plane so that the guiding point is located on the positive local y or z side respectively of the element see Figure 5 19 This is valid for the subsequently selected elements A plane option PLANE is defined by referring to three nodes The local coordinate system is defined for all elements in this plane as follows the local y x or z x plane depending on the option chosen will be parallel with the plane defined by the three nodes The direction of the local z or y axis correspond ingly will be normal to the plane and with its positive direction according to the right hand rule and the positive rotation defined by the three selected nodes See Figure 5 20 Note that if a local coordinate system is defined and one or both of the nodes of an element are reposi tione
169. ent of inertia about z axis gt 0 0 Product of inertia about y and z axes Minimum torsional sectional modulus about shear centre gt 0 0 Minimum sectional modulus about y axis 0 0 Minimum sectional modulus about z axis gt 0 0 Shear area in the direction of y axis gt 0 0 Shear area in the direction of z axis gt 0 0 Shear centre location from centroid y component SESAM Program version 6 9 shcenz sy SZ Preframe 10 SEP 2004 5 189 Shear centre location from centroid z component Static area moment about y axis 0 0 Static area moment about z axis gt 0 0 Figure 5 25 General section Preframe 5 190 SESAM 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 PROPERTY SECTION sctno I sctno I hz bt tt ty bb tb sfy sfz PURPOSE The command defines a symmetrical I or H cross section PARAMETERS sctn hz bt tt ty bb tb sfy sfz Section reference number Height Width of top flange Thickness of top flange Thickness of web Width of bottom flange Thickness of bottom flange Factors modifying the shear areas calculated by the program The modified shear ees are see the PRINT SECTION command for an explanation of the parame SHARY modified SHARY program x sfy SHARZ modified SHARZ program x sfz SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 191 AZ BT gt TT k HZ e y T
170. ent technique is implicitly being applied and the model created cannot constitute a complete model It is by definition a first level superelement that must be assembled using Presel as the only superelement or more likely together with other superelements to form the complete model as a higher level superelement SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 3 29 3 10 Change Data Most data defined may be changed using the CHANGE command This is relevant for instance when erro neous data has to be corrected The following two sections describe in more detail two of the many commands for changing data These two commands have special effects that may be utilised in situations other than for correcting erroneous data 3 10 1 Change Nodal Coordinates In addition to changing the nodal coordinates in the same manner as they were defined by the NODE com mand a group of nodes may be changed by the following two commands CHANGE NODE TRANSLATE CHANGE NODE ROTATE The former command will translate the selected nodes according to a vector given The latter command refers to a transformed coordinate system defined by the TRANSFORMATION com mand The procedure is illustrated in Figure 3 15 the shaded areas represent the selection of nodes that are moved all in the XY plane and can be described as follows e the positions of all selected nodes are calculated in the transformed coordinate system e these new coordinates values ar
171. ents the displacements subscripts d and i represent the dependent and independent d o f s respectively and b is the dependency factors given With the two node dependency all d o f s of a given node are made linearly dependent on the correspond ing d o f s of two other nodes The displacement of the dependent d o f s will be rd r Xb rox b SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 3 31 where b is a dependency factor given by the user Preframe will compute a default value for b as explained in Figure 3 16 b is computed based on the projection of the dependent node dependent nodes are indicated by blue triangles on colour screens onto the line between the two independent nodes independent nodes supernodes are indicated by blue octagons Normally the two node dependency has physical meaning only when the dependent and the two independ ent nodes lie on a straight line dependent node B b a b x independent node 1 independent node 2 7 Figure 3 16 Two node linear dependency the dependency factor b Note All independent d o f s must be super d o f s i e they have to be defined with boundary condi tion code super using the BOUNDARY command prior to giving the LINEAR DEPEND ENCY command The two node dependency alternative allows the user to define the independent nodes as super within the command by the FORCE INTO SUPER alternative This implies that using linear depen
172. er is asked whether to continue printing PARAMETERS FILE Page size of a print file to be specified SCREEN Page size of the screen to be specified nlines Number of lines SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 235 SET PRINT TABLE NODE BOUNDARY TABLE DIGITS TEXT NODE BOUNDARY TABLE PURPOSE The command switches between text or digit representation of the boundary condition codes See the PRINT NODE BOUNDARY command PARAMETERS DIGITS Digits will be used to represent the boundary condition codes in the print tables TEXT Text description will be used to represent the boundary condition codes in the print tables Preframe 5 236 10 SEP 2004 SET SOIL PROFILE X Y SOIL PROFILE X Y x value y value PURPOSE The command defines the global X and Y co ordinates used for display of soil profile PARAMETERS x value X co ordinate to be used y value X co ordinate to be used NOTES SESAM Program version 6 9 The command should preferably be used prior to the ADD DISPLAY SOIL PROFILE command SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 237 SET UNIT VECTOR TOLERANCE UNIT VECTOR TOLERANCE uvtol PURPOSE The command specifies the unit vector tolerance used for deciding whether two vectors span a plane and whether a matrix is orthonormal The unit vector tolerance has no unit and is initially set to 0 001 PARAMETERS uvtol Unit vector to
173. ertia forces will act down wards Note that the angular velocity and acceleration are given in radians PARAMETERS load case Load case number plx ply plz Point 1 for defining the axis of rotation p2x p2y p2z Point 2 for defining the axis of rotation ang vel Angular velocity in radians time unit ang acc Angular acceleration in radians time unit 2 Preframe SESAM Program version 6 9 5 118 10 SEP 2004 MASS ON NODE MASS ON NODE select nodes mass tx mass ty mass tz mass rx mass ry mass rz PURPOSE The command defines nodal masses This will be a diagonal mass matrix added to any mass contribution from the elements and from added mass While the unit of the translational masses is mass kg tons etc according to the chosen set of consistent units the unit of the rotational masses will be mass length kg mm tons m etc In comparison with the translational masses the rotational masses will normally contribute little to the solution and may be given the value zero Having defined a nodal mass a new MASS ON NODE command for the same node will accumulate masses a proper warning will be given PARAMETERS select nodes mass tx mass ty mass tz Masses with respect to translational d o f s mass rx mass ry mass rz Masses with respect to the rotational d o f s NOTES See also Select nodes see Section 5 1 PRINT NODE MASS ON NODE SESAM Preframe Prog
174. f the effect of this command Update can and stub lengths due to change in joint lay out by use of the command CHANGE JOINT select nodes CAN STUB LENGTH Similar as when first defined the can and stub lengths for tubular joints are calculated according to prede fined geometric rules The rules are defined by the parameters defined in the command SET CAN STUB LENGTH PARAMETER The commands CHANGE CAN and CHANGE STUB can be used to change both pipe section and lengths of joint strengthenings 3 6 3 Advanced gap calculations command PROPERTY GAP Structures consisting of tubular beams welded together in tubular joints constitute a most common type of design In the joint the tubular members with smaller diameters termed braces are welded onto the member with the largest diameter termed the chord A preferred design of such tubular joints is to have a certain minimum gap between the intersections of the various braces and the chord Therefore if two braces over Preframe SESAM 3 22 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 lap or their intersections with the chord are too close then the intersections are moved apart to ensure a proper gap The effect of this is that the neutral axis of one or more of the braces will not pass through the node This may be modelled as eccentricities or offsets of the brace ends compared to the nodes A PROPERTY GAP command is available for automatic introduction of eccentric attachment of braces beam elements
175. fine a sequence that may be repeated The braces are not commands themselves B A D y CP f The characters A B C and D in the examples above represent parameters being COMMANDS written in upper case and numbers written in lower case All numbers may be entered as real or integer values Brackets are used to enclose optional parameters Preframe SESAM 5 2 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 Note The command END is generally used to end repetitive entering of data Using double dot rather than END to terminate a command will depending on at which level in the command it is given save or discard the data entered Generally if the data entered up to the double dot is complete and self contained the double dot will save the data If in doubt it is always safest to leave a command by entering the required number of END commands 5 1 The Node and Element Select Features Selecting nodes and elements is relevant in many different commands e g the BOUNDARY DEFINE SET LOAD DISPLAY and PRINT commands This may be done in different ways e select a single node element by referring to the node element number e select a group of nodes elements by referring to the number of the first the last and the step in the num bering sequence e select all nodes elements on a straight line segment by referring to the two end nodes of the line e select all nodes elements in a plane by referring to three nodes
176. follows If you cannot tell which is which of node and element numbers because there are several numbers listed you may click lift the node or ele ment button Then only elements or nodes will be listed Note Note The line mode window only on Unix is inaccessible for entering data after having given the SET GRAPHIC INPUT ON command While entering a command by the keyboard it is not possible to click buttons or commands until hitting the Return key or deleting all data typed This involves that if you inadvertently have entered a space character which you may overlook as you cannot see it clicking com mands as well as selecting nodes and elements by clicking will not work Use the backspace to delete the space character s SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 3 7 Note Graphical selection of nodes and elements does not work if the Info button is depressed You will then instead get information on the nodes elements See the explanation of the Info button above 3 2 Node and Element Modelling 3 2 1 Creating Nodes Nodes are created by the NODE command and are identified by user chosen maximum seven digit integer numbers Alternative ways of creating nodes are shown below Figure 3 3 illustrates the result of these examples Note The command SET NUMBERING AUTOMATIC ON allows for automatic generation of node numbers in which case the node numbers are omitted in the commands below In the ex
177. for Frame Modelling Preframe is SESAM s preprocessors for modelling frame beam truss and cable models for hydrodynamic and or structural analysis In addition to creating the structural model i e data relevant for structural analysis in Sestra Preframe can be used for modelling certain hydrodynamic data relevant for hydrodynamic analysis in Wajac as well as certain joint and stability data relevant for code checking in Framework Finally Preframe may be used for modelling piles and soil relevant for structure pile soil interaction analy sis in Sestra and Splice Preframe is characterised by e Easy interactive input combined with graphical and printed feedback for model verification e Extensive data generation features A data management system allowing arbitrarily large models Input is interactively entered in Preframe The user is guided by prompts for data and graphic functions are available for visualising model data Data entered are logged on a command log journal file commands not changing the model for example a display command are by default not logged The log file can be used in a new Preframe session to regenerate the model A standard text editor can be used to modify the log file for the purpose of creating a modified model The log file is also a documentation and a backup of the modelling work Alternatively to interactive use Preframe can be run in batch background mode as explained in Chapter 4 For
178. fy the current model and leave Pre frame by the EXIT command Note If your Command input file constitutes the complete input then make sure the Database status is set to New You need to change Old to New if you previously have run Preframe in which case there will exist a Preframe database causing the Database status to come up as Old Note On the other hand if your Command input file shall be added to an existing model then leave Database status as Old In this way you may repeatedly add Command input files to build up your complete model You may for instance first read a file containing definition of your pre ferred beam cross section types leave Preframe and then read the modelling input referring to these cross section types Note You may also read a Command input file from inside Preframe by using the SET COM MAND INPUT FILE command followed by the command see these SESAM MANAGER 5 2 01 Project moduleframe Superelement 1 Al ES Result 2 el alate a RI Frame Modelling Program used PREFRAME Database status I Run interactively after command input file processing Y Write superelement on exit ha Figure 4 1 Manager and the Frame Modelling window with Command input file specification SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 4 3 4 1 3 Starting Preframe as an Individual Program on Unix Alternatively to starting Preframe from Manager it may on Unix be started as an individu
179. g element splitting the element into two new elements and creating a new element connecting the existing node with the new node X BRACING command creates an X bracing between four existing nodes PARAMETERS eltyp Type of element relevant element types are BEAM BEAS the regular two node beam SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 75 NONSTRUCTURAL BEAM BEAS N the non structural beam and TRUSS TESS the truss element NOTES Elements type BEAM BEAS must be used in connection with the PILE options Preframe SESAM OSEA Programversion6 9 GENERATE eltyp JACKET 4 LEGGED JACKET 6 LEGGED I bot w bot z bot l top w top z top l space 8 LEGGED z elev END followed by defining bracing type conductors sections and possible top offset defined through row no elev no END ALL LONGITUDINAL ROWS BRACINGS X BRACINOS ALL ROWS ALL ELEVATIONS TRANSVERSE ROW END END x cndct y cndct BEAMS NODES ONLY CONDUCTORS REGULAR GRID xg yg nx xsp ny ysp NONSTRUC TURAL END CONDUCTORS sctno elev no HORIZONTAL BRACINGS ALL ELEVATIONS END elev no ALL ELEVATIONS SECTIONS LEGS ROTTO ELEV NONE END elev no X BRACINGS ALL ELEVATIONS END END TOP OFFSET x offset y offset SESAM Preframe Progr
180. g to ground element on the display indicates its positive x axis The stiffness and flexibility matrices are symmetric about the diagonal and are thus specified by only giving the lower triangle of the matrices F Kr r K F where F is the force vector r is the displacement vector K is the stiffness matrix K is the flexibility matrix PARAMETERS matno Material reference number ndof Number of d o f s ky 1 ko 1 Kndofndof The elements of the lower triangle of the stiffness or flexibility matrix The ele ments are given column by column Krow column The elements outside the diagonal will have default value 0 0 Preframe SESAM 5 180 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 PROPERTY SECTION BAR BOX CHANNEL DOUBLE BOTTOM SECTION sctno GENERAL I L PIPE UNSYM I PURPOSE The command defines geometrical data for the cross sections The section types are bar e box e channel e double bottom e general I orH e L angle pipe un symmetrical I Cross sectional data are relevant for beam truss and non structural beam elements In the case of truss ele ments the data is only used to calculate the cross sectional area Figures accompanying the description of the cross sections explain the parameters defining the sections and show the local coordinate system of each section type The local x axis is directed into the paper plane The effec
181. gnment attributes i e if the node in the pile tip is moved all intermediate node will be moved to keep the elements forming the pile on a straight line A tip Use separate material number s for the piles The yield strength ref command ASSIGN PILE DATA YIELD STRENGTH assigned to the pile concepts will in Framework be assigned to the material number connected to the pile elements Preframe 5 88 SESAM 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 GENERATE eltyp PILE FROM SOIL CONDUCTOR BY NODE SELECT node select PILE FROM soil id MAIN SOIL ONE BY ONE node element PILE GROUP z tip sectno matno name PURPOSE The command generates one or several piles pile concepts based on the soil profile id given When using the BY NODE SELECT option it is presumed that it is only one element connected to each of the selected nodes The piles will be generated in the opposite direction of the incoming reference element PARAMETERS soil id CONDUCTOR MAIN PILE GROUP BY NODE SELECT ONE BY ONE node select node element z tip sectno matno name NOTES Soil profile identity to be used Piles will be defined as conductor piles in the concept definitions Piles will be defined as main piles in the concept definitions Piles will be defined as group of piles in the concept definitions Create one or several equal piles based on selected node s Create one pile
182. gravity load case direct ly after TO MASSES selection ELEMENT DISTRIBUTED LOAD Convert element distributed loads ELEMENT POINT LOAD Convert element point loads load case Load case number gravity load case Load case for which the acceleration of gravity is used select nodes Select nodes see Section 5 1 select elements Select elements see Section 5 1 NOTES This change of load to mass is only made on the condition that the forces to change and the referred acceler ation of gravity are parallel and with the same sign the x y and z components are considered in combina tion and not individually A load including moments is not changed even if its translational part the force is parallel with the acceleration of gravity Further a complex load a load including an imaginary part will not be changed this may first be changed to a real load by removing the imaginary part and then be changed to mass All forces all indexes for the selected node element and load case load case are changed and that part of the load case is deleted any other type of load for load case load case will not be affected In other words SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 37 the presence other types of load for the same load case do not prevent the nodal force and element load part to be changed to mass as long as it meets the requirements explained above The element loads will be lumped distributed to the start and end node
183. gure 5 11 PARAMETERS nodel node2 node3 node4 nodeno elno 4 STEP first element element step AUTO NOTES First and second node of the first line First and second node of the second line Node number of the intersection node created Element numbers of the four elements created Element numbers will be generated step wise Element number of first created element The step in element numbering Element numbers will be generated automatically The numbers will be generated in sequence starting with the highest current element number plus one You may find it convenient to display only a panel of the model by the DISPLAY ELEMENT PLANE com mand and then position the X bracing by clicking the appropriate nodes Further the SET DEFAULT SEC TION command may be used to pre select the appropriate section of a number of X bracings to be inserted SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 93 Note that the SET NUMBERING AUTOMATIC command may be used to switch on automatic assignment of node and element numbers The command will then not request node and element numbers The existence of element eccentricities has no effect on the X bracing as the X bracing is based on the posi tion of the four nodes only EXAMPLES Examples of command for generating a X bracing GENERATE BEAM BEAS X BRACING 101 211 111 201 151 15 16 17 8 END END 201 211 before 101 111
184. h node is manually given a number Element numbers of the created elements Each element is manually given a number Node element numbers will be generated step wise Node number of first created node The step in node numbering Element number of first created element The step in element numbering Node element numbers will be generated automatically The numbers will be gen erated in sequence starting with the highest current node element number plus one The line will be divided into ndiv equal spacings The spacings between the nodes starting in nodel If all ndiv spacings are entered they will be interpreted as relative spacings If less than ndiv spacings are entered they will be interpreted as true spacings and the remaining part will be divided into equal spacings The SET DEFAULT SECTION command may be used to pre select the appropriate section of the elements created SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 85 Note that the SET NUMBERING AUTOMATIC command may be used to switch on automatic assignment of node and element numbers The command will then not request node and element numbers SESAM Program version 6 9 Preframe 5 86 10 SEP 2004 GENERATE eltyp PILE CONDUCTOR BY NODE SELECT node select PILE MAIN ONE BY ONE node element PILE GROUP nofseg seglen nofelem sectno matno name PURPOSE The command generates one
185. he element This choice has effect only for elements with eccentricities The following example will illustrate the effect of the two options Figure 5 30 shows a beam element con nected to nodes A and B Eccentricities are defined in both ends e from node A to beam end 1 and eg from node B to beam end 2 projection of node A onto the element axis YF beam end 1 a E a flexible part of element node A SE eno NM NM ee e projection of node B 7 B X beam end 2 Figure 5 30 Effect of ELEMENT LOAD DISTANCE MODE command The PROJECTION OF NODES ON ELEMENT AXIS option will give a load referring to the distance dl while the END OF FLEXIBLE PART OF ELEMENT will give a load referring to the distance d2 The former option is the default PARAMETERS PROJECTION OF NODES ON ELEMENT AXIS Distance will be from the projection of nodes onto the element axis the default choice Preframe SESAM 5 210 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 END OF FLEXIBLE PART OF ELEMENT Distance will be from the ends of the flexible part of the element SESAM Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 SET GRAPHICS GRAPHICS PURPOSE ALTERNATIVE SCREEN DEVICE AUTO BASIC ELEMENT MODE CHARACTER TYPE COLOUR DEVICE EYE DIRECTION HIDDEN INPUT PLOT FILE PRESENTATION SHRINK FACTOR SIZE SYMBOLS Preframe 5 211 Enables the user to set different par
186. he modelling and these units must be adhered to throughout the analysis project i e in all SESAM programs employed The basis for determining a set of consistent units and some examples are given below The fundamental equation is FORCE MASS ACCELERATION In terms of the fundamental units of mass M length L and time T this equation may be written F M L T Force stress density etc are not fundamental units and must be derived in terms of the fundamental units of M L and T The first step in determining a set of consistent units is to select fundamental units Input values to the pro grams such as steel density and Young s modulus input to Preframe and water density and gravity input to Wajac must then be determined in terms of these fundamental units Whenever possible it is simplest to use the SI units or multiples of the SI units e length in metres m Preframe SESAM B 10 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 mass in kilograms kg e time in seconds s A force will then be in Newton N 1N 1kgm s B2 1 Example A model has been generated with centimetres cm as length unit We want our output force unit to be tonnes force tonnef and thus need to know which values for Young s modulus and steel density to specify in Preframe and which values for gravity and water density to specify in Wajac We first determine what our fundamental units of M L and T are L is in centimetres cm T is chosen to be
187. ian i A AA A A AA A 5 136 PRINPHINGE cont AA E A de ds 5 137 PRINTEOAD A O E sited 5 138 PRINT LOAD OVERVIEW cosita odas 5 139 PRINTEOAD SU Midi cdt ctiaida 5 140 PRINT LOAD lodd caSe ii aaa a a 5 141 PRINT EOGALZCOORDINA TE iieri Ai EAE ENE AE TE AEE ERER 5 143 PRINT MASS OF ELEMENT S rrn A A RAA AA Ar A A A EARR 5 145 PRINT MATERIA D orunla A E ERA EAA A NSA ENTA ANNA S 5 146 PRINENODE EAEE EEE ELE st Pac A A EA AAA N E EENE NE NE N AT 5 147 PRINT NODE BOUNDARY CONDITIONS oocccccoccccononancnnnnancnononancnonnonononnnnnrnnnnorononnnnocnnnnnrnnnns 5 148 PRINT NODE COORDINATES Scrin niun ia aaa iia 5 150 PRINT NODE INITIAL CONDITION cocccccnccncnonononononononononononinananancnnananononononcnnnnnnnnnonononenecononos 5 151 PRINT NODE LINEAR DEPENDENCY coccccccccncconocononononononincncncnnanananonononencnnnnonnnnononononecccnnananos 5 152 PRINT NODE MASS ON NODE cei eesi ertrini tea Eea ei ea A EE ARRA 5 153 PRINT SECTION ti toco 5 154 PRINT SOIE it eee ies I ek i AA AE 5 156 PRINT STATUS ud ATTAN I a 5 158 PRINT STRUCTURE CONCEP Ta a aE ETE a a ea eh ba 5 160 PRINT TRANSFORMATION cissccccccosccccsveccecsvssescoveseceedesecendvocceniosccnsiseadhbocucessveetessveertstvesteeeset 5 162 PROPERT Via sss Tna AO otedaiea tbedies oat dean A A 5 163 PROPERTY CONNECT vet sss085 asses idoneidad croacia sounds cocino nn cas 5 164 PROPERTY EGCGENERIGLT Y cc dsc dices iii 5 165 PROPER DY GAP al N A EN adeee 5 166 PROPERTY HINGE cusco la
188. icate is shown in Figure 1 2 The program Manager manages an analysis job including modelling analysis and results processing by acti vating the proper programs and handling the files involved SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 1 3 Manager x J x y ENVIRONMENTAL ANALYSIS PREPROCESSIN POSTPROCESSINC Z n Zz fe F Y e 1 Y PACKAGES INTEGRATED PROGRAM Figure 1 2 SESAM overview Preframe SESAM 1 4 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 1 3 How to read the Manual Chapter 2 FEATURES OF PREFRAME contains an introductory description of the major features of Pre frame Chapter 3 USER S GUIDE TO PREFRAME explains how to create a complete model ready for analysis All major features and several minor features are described The chapter does not contain a full description of all program features though a complete understanding of all features of Preframe can only be obtained through training in use of the program while referring to Chapter 5 Chapter 4 EXECUTION OF PREFRAME contains more special information not intended for the new user who will be using Manager to control his SESAM analysis The chapter explains how to start Preframe out side Manager and operate it in line mode not using the graphical user interface The files used by Preframe are also explained Practical information is provided on how to operate Preframe and manipulate its files in various ways Built in and ha
189. igit number identifying the conductor 01 02 03 etc Note that all node numbers have as last digit to allow for new node numbers to be inserted in between The numbering system for the elements is as follows Elements along the legs have five digit numbers beginning with 1 They can be written as 1ij1 where iis a two digit number identifying the elevation number 00 at the bottom of the legs 01 at the first elevation 02 at the second elevation and so on and j is the leg number 1 4 for four legged 1 6 for six legged and 1 8 for eight legged jackets Elements of the horizontal bracings have six digit numbers beginning with 2 They can be written as 21jk1 where iis as above a two digit number identifying the elevation number and j and k are the leg numbers on either side of the element Notice that the sequence of the leg numbers j and k also identifies in which direction the local x axis is pointing i e from j to k Elements of the X bracings have six digit numbers beginning with 3 The four elements constituting the X bracing have numbers that can be written as 31jk1 3ijk2 3ikj1 and 3ikj2 where iis as above a two digit number identifying the elevation number and j and k are the leg numbers on either side of the element Notice that the sequence of the leg numbers j and k also identifies in which direction the local x axis is pointing i e from j to k Conductor elements have six digit numbers begin
190. in the right column of the table printed See the SET ELEMENT LOAD DISTANCE MODE command for an explanation of the effect of distrib uted load on an element with eccentricities Preframe SESAM 5 166 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 PROPERTY GAP GAP node chord el aligned el legal gap FIXED BRACE element no IGNORE BRACE SYMMETRIC ELEMENT element no element no FIXED BRACE element no GAP element no element no legal gap END PURPOSE The command introduces eccentricities for braces in a tubular joint The use of the command is explained in detail in Section 3 6 3 PARAMETERS node chord el aligned el legal gap FIXED BRACE IGNORE BRACE SYMMETRIC ELEMENTS GAP END NOTES Node number for which the eccentricities shall be introduced The chord element The aligned element The minimum allowable gap Select a brace for which the eccentricity shall not be changed Other braces will be moved with respect to this Select a brace which shall not be moved and which will not in fluence other braces The brace s may only be selected before the first fixed brace is specified Select two braces which shall be moved equally away from each other if the gap is too small Specify a special gap between a pair of elements The specification is complete The calculation will start and some execution time should be expected See the
191. ing joint capacity check on joints at member ends only Members may be displayed by the command DISPLAY MEMBER and labelled by the command LABEL MEMBER NAMES Elements belonging to a member are automatically assigned the alignment attribute PARAMETERS MEMBER Manually create a member MEMBER FROM ELEMENTS Create members from selected elements The sub commands and data are fully explained on the following pages Preframe SESAM 5 46 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 CREATE MEMBER MEMBER name nodel node2 PURPOSE The command creates a member defined by element s on line a straight line between two joints nodes PARAMETERS name Member name nodel Existing node defining start of member node2 Existing node defining end of member NOTES When using double beam elements e g jacket leg and inner pile connected by use of shim elements please note the following To avoid problems with respect to creating member concepts use offsets between the nodes for leg and nodes for pile The offset perpendicular to beam element local X axis must be larger than the defined coordinate tolerance ref command SET COORDINATE TOLERANCE value SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 47 CREATE MEMBER FROM ELEMENT MEMBER FROM ELEMENT select elements PURPOSE The command creates members by a one to one mapping between selected elements and members The member name will be equal to the
192. ing pipe section a new section will auto matically be created Elements belonging to a member may at any time be modified with respect to section and material by use of the command PROPERTY CONNECT See also CHANGE CONE PROPERTY CONNECT Preframe SESAM 5 14 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 ASSIGN HYDRODYNAMIC DRAG COEFFICIENT cdx cdy cdz HYDRODYNAMIC FLOODING COEFFICIENT floo INERTIA COEFFICIENTS cmx cmy cmz ALL BY ELEMENT BY NAME PURPOSE The command assigns hydrodynamic coefficients to members PARAMETERS DRAG COEFFICIENT Assign drag coefficients cdx Drag coefficient value local x axis cdy Drag coefficient value local y axis cdz Drag coefficient value local z axis FLOODING COEFFICIENT floo INERTIA COEFFICIENT Assign flooding status Flooding parameter 0 0 not flooded 1 0 completely flood ed Assign inertia coefficients cmx Inertia coefficient value local x axis cmy Inertia coefficient value local y axis cmz Inertia coefficient value local z axis ALL Assign to all existing members BY ELEMENT Assign to existing member containing at least one of the select ed elements Select elements by use of standard select element options If the selection contains elements that are not part of any members new members will be created with the member name equal to element number BY NAME Assign to
193. int The brace in the middle will not be moved i e eccentricities will be applied to the K braces to obtain the given gap value Preframe SESAM A 22 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 Figure A 8 KT joint Symmetric K joint For symmetric K joints each of the two braces will be moved equally 1 e half of the given gap value The braces are defined as symmetric when the difference between the angles between the braces and the perpen dicular to the chord is less than 5 degrees inclusive estimated eccentricity SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 A 23 Figure A 9 Symmetric K joint Non symmetric K joint For non symmetric K joints only the brace with the smallest inclination to the chord will be moved i e eccentricities will be applied to obtain the given gap value Preframe SESAM A 24 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 Figure A 10 Non symmetric K joint SESAM Program version 6 9 APPENDIX B Preframe 10 SEP 2004 B 1 THEORY B1 Formulae for Sectional Parameters Note This section is incomplete in that the formulae for sectional parameters are lacking The for mulae may be found in the Prefem User Manual The formulae employed in Preframe for computing the sectional parameters for the various beam cross sec tions are given in the following The formulae are taken from Ref 1 Ref 2 and Ref 3 The following notation is used AREA IX IY
194. int canta a ae paca 1 1 Preframe Preprocessor for Frame ModelliM8 ooconoocnincnicninonconoconcnoncnonoon nooo nononcnnncanronn noo naconannos 1 1 Preframe inthe SESAM System rai A ii a ide 1 2 How to read the Manual aSo renerne eeen una c dave ul eante et loader tas 1 4 SEALS TEA O NN 1 4 FEATURES OF PREFRAME ccccconncconnnccononcccnnncccnnoncnnncccnnonoco conan conococoncccconcccccono conoce cono 2 1 Modelling Nodes and Elements ornice oireet a ea aee Eaa a aanp atr eteo a eE 2 1 Modeline Properties iria i E E E E E E E E EE E 2 2 Conc pt aldata ociosas daniel EE EPE ARE 2 3 Short Description of Commands ccccccccssccssscesseesseeseceseeeeeseecessecseecsecssecseceseesaeceaeceseeeeeeneecsaenseees 2 3 Transfer of the Model through the Input Interface File ec eeceesseeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaecaeeeeeeeeeeeaes 2 6 2 5 1 Writing and Optimising the Input Interface File ieeeeceeeeceeseeececeeeeeeeeeeeecesceaeeaeeas 2 7 Interaction with other SESAM Programs ccccscessscesecesceeeceseecscenseceeceseeesecaaeceseseeeesaecsaeneeeseeenaes 2 8 USER S GUIDE TO PREFRAME oooncccccnccosnncconnnccnonoconanocnonocononocononocononoccnococcono conoce nooo 3 1 Getting Started the Graphical User Interface cceccccecesscesscesseesseeseceseceneeeseesseeaeceseeneeseneenaes 3 2 Node and ElementModellMS curia ni td dt diia 3 7 3 21 Creating NOdES ii a at e ete 3 7 372 2 Creating Elements ida ita Added EEE 3 8 3 2 3 Degrees of Freedom
195. inted answer NO or also data computed for the section area and moments of inertia answer YES The tables have the following appearances The overview SECTION NO SECTION 2 CHANNEL 11 PIPE 22 I 99 GENERAL TYPE DIAM HEIGHT TH 4 000000 12 000000 7 000000 Data for a single section including data computed for the section SECTION NUMBER 2 SECTION TYPE E CHANNEL HZI HEIGHT AT END BY FLANGE WIDTH TZ FLANGE THICKNESS EY WEB THICKNESS SFY SHEAR FACTOR Y DIRECTION SFZ SHEAR FACTOR Z DIRECTION K WEB LOCATION IN LOCAL Y DIRECTION AREA CROSS SECTION AREA IX TORSIONAL MOMENT OF INERTIA ABOUT SHEAR CENTRE TY MOMENT OF INERTIA ABOUT Y AXIS IZ MOMENT OF INERTIA ABOUT Z AXIS IYZ PRODUCT OF INERTIA ABOUT Y AND Z AXES WXMIN MIN TORSIONAL SECTION MODULUS ABOUT SHEAR CENTRE WYMIN MIN SECTION MODULUS ABOUT Y AXIS WZMIN MIN SECTION MODULUS ABOUT Z AXIS SHARY SHEAR AREA IN THE DIRECTION OF Y AXIS SHARZ SHEAR AREA IN THE DIRECTION OF Z AXIS SHCENY SHEAR CENTRE LOCATION FROM CENTROID Y COMPONENT SHCENZ SHEAR CENTRE LOCATION FROM CENTROID Z COMPONENT POSITIV ooo FF WAI 8B PRENMrF Wes oooooo oooooo OOOO O O oooooo Gl 10 000000 8 213333 1 5 2333333 6 433334 0 000000 10666
196. ion for the model accounting for any nodal masses and element masses The element masses are based on Density of elements defined by the PROPERTY MATERIAL command Cross sectional area of elements defined by the PROPERTY SECTION command Length of the elements being the node to node distance or the element end to end distance see the detailed description of the command e Rotation of structure An acceleration field due to angular velocity a centripetal acceleration field and or acceleration tangential acceleration field about an arbitrary axis is put up The resulting inertia loads are computed by the analysis program in the same manner as described for the gravity load above The loads should be given consecutive load case numbers 1 2 3 or else computation time will be spent in the analysis program Sestra solving zero load cases A single load case may contain all and any of the load types above And except for the gravity and rotation of structure loads the same load type may be repeated several times Several loads may be specified for the same node element within the same load case A load index is used to distinguish between individual loads of the same type for the same node element for the same load case For example a nodal force defined for the second time for the same node for the same load case is given index 2 Note that the load index may change after deletion the load index always goes from 1 to
197. ions Graphics Devices The graphical user interface is implemented for OSF Motif X Window Windows 98 Windows NT and Windows 2000 Under OSF Motif X Window window stretching is disallowed use the WINDOW SIZE command line argument instead Memory Preframe allocates memory buffers for access to data of the data base file When using the graphical user interface Preframe will allocate memory for the display File access buffer The memory is allocated when Preframe is started and the amount is fixed until exiting the program The amount of memory allocated can be changed by editing the configuration password file To change the amount insert or modify the line MSIZE PREFRAME BUFFER buffer bytes where buffer bytes represents the amount of memory Preframe will allocate in bytes The default value is 2457600 2 4576 millions representing 150 buffers of 16384 bytes each The buffer should be changed Preframe SESAM 4 10 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 if for example there is not enough memory to use the graphical user interface Note however that in creasing the memory for buffers will not improve performance much e Memory for graphical user interface The graphic mode window will use memory and allocate it when needed Large displays will need more memory than small displays Typing While typing a command using the keyboard you cannot click commands in menus or select nodes and ele ments by clicking or use the mouse i
198. ipe outer diameter default element to split thk Thickness of pipe wall default element to split sfy Pipe section shear area modifying factor local y axis sfz Pipe section shear area modifying factor local z axis length Stub length secno Section number to be used as stub element NOTES For the JOINT option the pipe section parameters must be given for each brace The default stub length is calculated according to given parameters see command SET CAN STUB LENGTH PARA METERS and joint geometry If the pipe section parameters given do not correspond to an existing pipe section a new section will auto matically be created Elements belonging to a member may at any time be modified with respect to section and material by use of the command PROPERTY CONNECT Preframe 5 42 10 SEP 2004 See also ASSIGN STUB SET CAN STUB LENGTH PARAMETERS PROPERTY CONNECT SESAM Program version 6 9 SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 43 COPY LINE pec source estination i COPY PLANE ea number incre element number increment SET setname vector PURPOSE The command copies all previously created nodes and elements of the referred line segment plane or set to a new position The new node and element numbers are determined by incrementing the numbers of the source nodes elements by user defined values The following data are copied nodes e element
199. is connected to node 111 node numbers are not labelled The coordinate system of the element is the same as the global coordi nate system The material number which previously must have been defined as a SPRING TO GROUND stiffness matrix is 2 ELEMENT DAMPER TO GROUND 16 111 TRANSFORMATION 5 3 See Figure 5 5 right the new DAMPER TO GROUND element is given number 16 and is connected to node 111 node numbers are not labelled The coordinate system of the element is the global coordinate system transformed with transformation number 5 The material number which previously must have been defined as a DAMPER TO GROUND damping matrix is 3 SESAM Program version 6 9 Figure 5 5 10 SEP 2004 Preframe 5 71 SPRING TO GROUND element left and a DAMPER TO GROUND element right Preframe SESAM 5 72 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 ELEMENT single BEAM TRUSS NONSTRUCTURAL BEAM AXI AL SPRING and AXIAL DAMPER elno nodel node2 PURPOSE The command creates a 2 node element connected to two existing nodes PARAMETERS elno Number of element to create nodel node2 The two nodes of element elno SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 73 EXIT EXIT PURPOSE The command interrupts the program execution All files opened are properly saved and closed The user may resume the modelling at a later stage by referring to the model file and command log file as old when re entering P
200. is may be caused by the user by for example inadvertently deleting the model file or it may be due to an inconsistency in the data model Such inconsistency may occur for several reasons The computer goes down e The disk is full the disk quota is exhausted or user privileges are inadequate e There is an error in the program If Preframe discovers an inconsistency in the data model the program will normally close all files opened and abort the execution Preframe may then be restarted using the model file In some cases however it will not be possible to resume normal execution due to an irrecoverable inconsistency If the model file is lost it can be reconstructed by re executing the program and reading input from the command log file i e using it as a command input file Note The model file will normally not be compatible between different versions of Preframe The command log file may however be used as input to a new version 4 1 6 Creating Plots for Reports The CGM plot format see the SET PLOT FORMAT command is well suited for importing SESAM plots into reports produced by MS Word and other word processors You may also transfer CGM files from one operating system to another just make sure to use the binary option when transferring the file with FTP or another protocol Depending on the capabilities of your word processor the PostScript plot format may also be used for the
201. is means that the node element numbers or numbering options STEP or AUTO chosen by the program during automatic numbering will be logged This ensures that an identical model will be re created when using the command log file as input to a future execution PARAMETERS ON The automatic numbering is switched on OFF The automatic numbering is switched off This is the default condition OLD SYSTEM The automatic numbering is switched to be compatible with input files made prior to Preframe version 6 9 01 see notes below NEW SYSTEM The automatic numbering is switched to the updated numbering system used when switched to ON This is default from version 6 9 01 NOTES The automatic numbering system for nodes and elements has been updated due to lack of functionality e g highest used node and element numbers were not correctly determined after use of COPY and DELETE commands To obtain compatibility with old models i e give the same node and element numbers as in previous version of Preframe when running command input files with the automatic numbering activated the following command should be added at the top of the command input file SET NUMBERING AUTO MATIC OLD SYSTEM END Hence if you are concerned with compatibility search in your command input file for the text command AUTO and insert the above command if AUTO is found SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 227 If you continue to work on the model after ex
202. ish it from the user s own comments This makes it easy to strip a command log file for program information in connection with creating a command input file any fairly good editor will have a macro functionality or similar enabling you to locate and remove all lines with Moreover comments preceded by will not be logged on the command log file to avoid irrelevant logging of program information when using an unedited command log file as a command input file SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 4 5 4 1 5 Files used by Preframe The file environment of Preframe is illustrated in Section 4 2 The file extensions MOD JNL etc are given together with file descriptions model file El Ga eS O a en ad El Z o A Z plot file print file various lis Figure 4 2 The file environment of Preframe The files are The command log journal file JNL is an ASCH file on which all commands and data given to the program are logged This means that both data typed or clicked by the user and data read by the pro gram from a command input file will be logged However commands not changing the model and data base e g a command displaying data will not be logged The time of opening and closing the model file is also logged The file is very useful as a backup file both for verification purposes and for later use as a command input file
203. iven on succeeding lines PARAMETERS select elements Select elements see Section 5 1 SESAM Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 PRINT HINGE HINGE select elements PURPOSE Preframe 5 137 The command prints a table of the hinges of the elements The table has the following appearance EXT EL SUPER ELEMI ND 122 I 2 324 1 2 422 1 2 ENT TYPE 1 LEVEL 1 HINGE VALUE TX TY TZ RX 1 000 1 000 0 000 0 000 6 000 5 000 INFINITY INFINITY 0 100 0 200 0 300 0 400 1 000 1 000 0 000 0 000 0 100 0 200 30 000 40 000 1 000 1 000 0 000 0 000 columns of the table give from left to right user defined external element number the first and second node of the element hinge values coefficients for the six d o f s coordinate system of hinge values G global L local hinge code see the PROPERTY HINGE command DFIX degree of fixation the hinge values are coefficients between 0 and 1 ESTIF inter element elastic spring stiffness the hinge values are stiffnesses PARAMETERS select elements Select elements see Section 5 1 Preframe SESAM 5 138 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 PRINT LOAD ALL LOADCASES OVERVIEW SUM LOAD load case PURPOSE The command prints tables over the loads The ALL LOADCASES option prints all load cases The loads are primarily sorte
204. kef kilograms force L fundamental length symbol m metres mm millimetres M fundamental mass symbol N Newtons s seconds t tonnes tonnef tonnes force T fundamental time symbol Preframe SESAM B 12 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 rho density Table B 1 Examples of consistent units time unit is second Typical program input values Length unit Mass unit Force unit Density of steel Young s modulus for steel L M ML T Mass Volume Force Area M L M L T m kg IN 7 85 105 2 10 10 m 10 kg 1t 10 N 7 85 2 10 108 cm kg 102 N 7 85 107 2 10 10 cm 10 kg 1t 10N Ikgf 7 85 10 2 10 10 mm kg 10 N 7 85 10 2 10 108 mm 10 kg 1t IN 7 85 10 2 10 10 cm 10 kg IN 7 85 107 2 10 107 m 10 kg 1 tonnef 10000 N 7 85 107 2 10 107 cm 10 kg 1 tonnef 10000 N 7 85 10 2 10 10 mm 107 kg 1 tonnef 10000 N 7 85 10713 2 10 m 10 kg l kgf 10 N 7 85 10 2 10 10 cm 10 kg l kgf 10 N 7 85 10 2 10 10 mm 10 kg 1 kgf 10 N 7 85 10719 2 10 10 SESAM Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 REFERENCES 1 W Beitz K H Kiittner Dubbel Taschenbuch f r den Maschinenbau 17 Auflage 17th ed Springer Verlag 1990 2 Arne Selberg Stalkonstruksjoner Tapir 1972 3 S Timoshenko Strength of Materials Part I Elementary Theory and Problems Third Edition 1995 D Van Nostrand Company Inc Pr
205. last is N where N is the number of nodes optimising the node numbering will change this this number is normally of no interest to the user e the coordinates given in the global coordinate system BOU CON boundary condition an X indicates that some boundary condition has been defined for some of the d o f s of the node blank indicates that all d o f s of the node are FREE ND number of d o f s of the node The format of the print of the coordinates may be changed by the SET PRINT FORMAT command PARAMETERS select nodes Select nodes see Section 5 1 SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 151 PRINT NODE INITIAL CONDITION INITIAL CONDITION select nodes PURPOSE The command prints a table of the initial conditions defined for the nodes The table has the following appearance SUPER ELEMENT TYPE 1 LEVEL 1 EXT INT INITIAL CONDTION NO NO RX RY RZ TYPE 01 1 5 000000 6 000000 7 000000 VELO 8 000000 9 000000 10 000000 105 2 1 000000 0 000000 8 000000 DISP 5 000000 5 000000 0 000000 105 2 1 000000 2 000000 3 000000 VELO 4 000000 5 000000 6 000000 columns of the table give from left to right e user defined external node number e internal node number initially the first node created is number 1 the last is N where N is the number of nodes optimising the node numbering will change this this number is normally of no interest
206. lculated according to predefined geometric rules The rules are defined by the parameters defined in the command SET CAN STUB LENGTH PARAME TER Can and stub sections can only be the start or end segment of a member hence members shall normally be defined between two structural joints The member information is read and used by Framework Two switches can be used in connection with the ASSIGN command SET ASSIGN OPTION MANUAL NUMBERING when switched ON it allows the user to manually give node and element number to the node and element created by the command SET ASSIGN OPTION SECTION NUMBER when switched ON it allows the user to give a section number to the strengthening element instead of specifying PIPE geometry data SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 3 21 HEAVY WALL SECTION OF CHORD ECCENTRICITY ESER D 4 or 5 Min 300mm Min 300ram d or Min 600mm G Zee OF HEAVY WALL OR SPECIAL STEEL IN BRACE Figure 3 11 Detail of simple joint with strengthening 3 6 2 Change joint geometry The command CHANGE JOINT is used to update joints regarding required length of can and stub sections and for calculation of brace eccentricities to satisfy minimum gap between braces planewise i e plane defined by chord and braces Update joints with brace eccentricities due to minimum gap by use of the command CHANGE JOINT select nodes GAP PLANEWISE See Section A 3 for illustrations o
207. ld not be con fused with the SET command which sets various control pa rameters Sets defined are written to the Input Interface File see Section 2 5 Element sets may be referred to in Wajac Both node and elements sets are transferred through the Sestra analysis program to the Results Interface File thus enabling the postprocessors to retrieve the sets The command is also used to define soil profile soil parameters and certain input data for the program Gensod a part of Splice displays the model The nodes and elements may be displayed alone or combined Member and pile concepts may be selected for display Node and element numbers boundary condition codes etc may be annotated using the LABEL command Loads may be added by the ADD DISPLAY command In ad dition to the node and element displays a 3 D view of a single joint may be displayed as well as its footprint the chord brace intersections on a developed chord creates elements The element type is chosen together with the nodes to which the element is connected creates both nodes and elements In addition to generating a more or less complete jacket a line of nodes and elements may be generated rather than creating a line of nodes followed by a line of elements and various bracing configurations may be in serted in a model The command also creates piles provides information on the command syntax and how to get technical support The command also launches the Status
208. le of Figure 5 31 below The advantage of shrinking basic elements is that each element can be distinguished from the others PARAMETERS shrinkfac Shrink factor Figure 5 31 a Normal element mesh shrink factor 1 0 b Shrunken elements shrink factor 0 7 Preframe SESAM 5 222 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 SET GRAPHICS SIZE SYMBOLS ALL NUMBERS BOUNDARY CONDITION SYMBOLS ELEMENT NUMBERS LOAD ARROWS LOAD VALUES SIZE SYMBOLS LOCAL COORDINATE SYMBOLS size MATERIAL NUMBERS NODE NUMBERS NODE SYMBOLS ONE NODED ELEMENT SYMBOLS ORIGIN SYMBOL SECTION NUMBERS PURPOSE The command specifies the sizes of the symbols appearing on the displayed picture and the plot The sym bol sizes are given in mm If the sizes of numbers are changed the numbers will be drawn with SOFTWARE see the SET GRAPHICS CHARACTER TYPE command characters in order to ensure correct sizes PARAMETERS size ALL NUMBERS BOUNDARY CONDITION SYMBOLS ELEMENT NUMBERS LOAD ARROWS LOAD VALUES LOCAL COORDINATE SYMBOLS MATERIAL NUMBERS NODE NUMBERS Symbol size in mm All numbers elements nodes materials etc will be re sized Symbols for boundary conditions will be re sized Element numbers will be re sized Load arrows will be re sized Load values will be re sized Local coordinate symbols will be re sized Material numbers will be re sized
209. lements constituting the piles are recognised by being part of so called pile con cepts Nodes and elements are identified by user chosen numbers The user chosen node numbers are termed exter nal node numbers as opposed to the internal node numbers see Section 2 5 for the difference between the two Preframe SESAM 2 2 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 The following types of elements may be created e Two node beam element e Two node truss element e Two node axial spring and damper elements Single node spring and damper elements connecting the structure to the ground e Two node general spring element e Two node shim element stiffness only in two translational directions Two node non structural beam element contributes with mass and loads but has no stiffness 2 2 Modelling Properties Additionally to creating nodes and elements the modelling consists of defining boundary conditions cross sections material types local coordinate systems and a number of other model properties Loads acting in nodes or on elements can be defined Also acceleration fields like gravity and structure rotation centripetal acceleration that generate inertia loads may be defined The main commands for property modelling are BOUNDARY for specifying fixations and other boundary conditions PROPERTY for defining Cross sections Material types Local coordinate systems Eccentricities or rigid ends Hinged connection
210. lerance Preframe SESAM 5 238 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 SET WRITE MODE 3DIMENSIONAL WRITE MODE 2DIMENSIONAL PURPOSE The command is used to generate a 2 dimensional model as an alternative to the standard 3 dimensional model When generating the Input Interface File containing the FE model after giving the command SET WRITE MODE 2DIMENSIONAL the model is converted from a 3 D to a 2 D model by blocking the following three d o f s the translation in y and the rotations about x and z Thus the 2 D model generated can be used directly for a 2 D analysis Note that the program does not give any warning or message if the model gener ated contains data related to the d o f s which are blocked during writing the 2 D model PARAMETERS 3DIMENSIONAL Three dimensional model 2DIMENSIONAL Two dimensional model SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 239 SPLIT ELEMENT WISE SPLIT sub commands NODE WISE PURPOSE The command is used to split beam elements into two or many elements PARAMETERS ELEMENT WISE Split by selecting element only NODE WISE Split by selecting node and element The sub commands and data are fully explained on the following pages Preframe SESAM 5 240 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 SPLIT ELEMENT WISE EVEN nodeno ELEMENT WISE elno ndiv STEP startnode stepno space AUTO
211. lot was generated will be given on the plot together with the scale the superelement number and the superelement level 1 The scale shown on the plot will be correct only if the coordinates are given in metres Note that text lines containing blank characters must be enclosed in apostrophes this is an example text PARAMETERS textline Text line plot width Width of plot in metres Height of plot is 1 4 times width of plot NOTES The SOIL option should preferably be used after the ADD DISPLAY SOIL PROFILE command See also SET GRAPHICS PLOT FILE SESAM Preframe 5 130 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 Z z E Y TEST MODEL X NODE NUMBERS DATE 18 OCT 2001 TIME 14 13 26 SCALE 1 300 SUP EL TYPE 1 E S paN NY SUP EL LEVEL 1 Figure 5 18 Plot of model SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 131 PRINT ALL CONCEPT ATTRIBUTES DATA CHECK ECCENTRICITY ELEMENT HINGE LOADS LOCAL COORDINATE PRINT MASON sub commands MATERIAL NODE SECTION SOIL STATUS STUCTURE CONCEPT TRANSFORMATION PURPOSE The command prints data in tables either on the screen or to a file The destination is controlled by the SET PRINT DESTINATION command The SET PRINT FILE command may be used to specify the name of the print file which by default will be the name of the model file with file extension LI
212. lt not logged Activate logging by the command SET JOURNALLING PRINT ON Preframe 5 146 10 SEP 2004 PRINT MATERIAL MATERIAL matno ALL OVERVIEW END PURPOSE SESAM Program version 6 9 The command prints material data Data for a single or all material numbers may be printed or a simple overview of the materials may be printed The tables have the following appearances ATERIAL NUMBER 3 ATERIAL TYPE Spring to ground matrix atrix type No of degrees of freedom 0 1000E 01 0 0000E 00 0 2000E 01 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 0 3000E 01 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 0 4000 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 0 0000 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 0 0000 ATERIAL NUMBER 4 ATERIAL TYPE Linear isotropic elastic Young s modulus Poisson s ra Density Thermal expa tio nsion coefficient MATERIAL NUMBER 6 MATERIAL TYPE Axial spring Axial spring constant PARAMETERS matno Material reference number FLEXIBILITY 6 E 01 E 00 0 5000E 01 E 00 0 0000E 00 structural analysis 0 2100E 12 0 3000E 00 0 7850E 04 0 1200E 04 0 3450E 03 0 6000E 01 SESAM Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 PRINT NODE BOUNDARY CONDITION COORDINATE NODE INITIAL CONDITION LINEAR DEPENDENCY MASS ON NODE PURPOSE The command prints different tables of data rela
213. m version 6 9 A 14 10 SEP 2004 D OL 2 14 5 3 3 27 5 4 4 36 935 45 0 3 5 END ASSIGN SOIL DATA PY TZ QZ CODE Z LEVEL 1 5 287 293 293 END SKIN FRICTION Z LEVEL 1 5 5 0 3 0 1 0 0 1E 01 0 5 0 5E 01 Z LEVEL 3 5 15 0 11 0 1 0 0 1E 01 0 5 0 5E 01 Z LEVEL 5 5 45 0 45 0 1 0 0 1E 01 0 5 0 5E 01 Z LEVEL 14 5 75 0 75 0 1 0 0 1E 01 0 5 0 5E 01 Z LEVEL 27 5 110 0 95 0 1 0 0 1E 01 0 5 0 5E 01 END TIP RESISTANCE Z LEVEL 36 5 120 0 120 0 1 0 0 1E 01 13350 0 0 5 0 5E 01 Z LEVEL 101 5 120 0 120 0 1 0 0 1E 01 14000 0 0 5 0 5E 01 END 3 Generate the piles Generate one pile in each corner and assign pile parameters data GENERATE BEAM BEAS PILE FROM SOIL 1 MAIN BY NODE SELECT 10031 10041 10021 10011 NO 40 75 4 2 ASSIGN PILE DATA YIELD STRENGTH 350 0E 03 CONCEPT ALL TIP CODE O Pile tip is free 1 Pile tip is fixed 2 Pile infinitely long beneath tip 3 2 modified axial stiffness ND Pile infinitely long below node ND 1 ALL Density fluid 1 0 tonnes m3 equals gamma fluid 9 81 kN m3 on PILGEN INP DENS FLUID 1 0 CONCEPT ALL END END 4 Write superelement and template input files to Gensod and Splice WRITE BANDWIDTH 1 WRITE GENSOD SPLICE TEMPLATE 1 1 21 Preframe SESAM Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 bak aa Jacket SAND 2 poe eee M M T CLAY 3 k lt p M 14 5 M M Pile name y CLAY 4 Soil type and number roo SS ee i P 27 5 Z lev
214. mation number oldtrano EXAMPLES ELEMENT BEAM LINE 111 141 STEP 11 10 See Figure 5 3 the new elements 11 through 61 are created along the line segment defined by nodes 111 and 141 The nodes 111 112 113 114 121 131 and 141 are positioned on a straight line Note that the node numbering step is not constant The program determines that there will be six elements along the line and demands six element numbers to be given Figure 5 4 Creating an ELEMENT LINE SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 69 ELEMENT single GENERAL SPRING and SHIM ELEMENT elno nodel node2 coord sys where coord sys is GLOBAL X Y Z LOCAL elnor Z X Y newtrano Y Z X TRANSFORMATION oldtrano PURPOSE The command creates a GENERAL SPRING or a SHIM ELEMENT between two existing nodes PARAMETERS elno Number of the element to create nodel node2 The two nodes of element elno GLOBAL The coordinate system of the new element is the same as the global coordinate sys tem LOCAL The coordinate system of the new element is taken from the coordinate system of the previously created element elnor as follows The X Y Z axes of elnor corre sponds to the X Y X Z X Y or Y Z X axes of the new element elno The transfor mation from the global coordinate system to the local coordinate system of the new element is stored as a new transformation with reference number newtrano TRANSF
215. may also be given name Name of member to be defined nodel Existing node defining start of member node2 Existing node defining end of member NOTES Elements belonging to a member may at any time be modified with respect to section and material by use of the command PROPERTY CONNECT The switch SET ASSIGN OPTION MANUAL NUMBERING can be used in connection with the ASSIGN SEGMENT command When switched ON the user may manually give node and element number to the node and element created by this command See also PROPERTY CONNECT SET ASSIGN OPTION MANUAL NUMBERING SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 19 ASSIGN SOIL DATA PY TZ QZ CODE NODE node SOIL DATA SKIN FRICTION data set Z LEVEL z level TIP RESISTANCE where the data set for PY TZ QZ CODE is defined through py code tz code qz code where the data set for SKIN FRICTION is defined through skin cmp skin tns g0 soil ds dia rat pois dt dia rat where the data set for TIP RESISTANCE is defined through skin cmp skin tns g0 soil ds dia rat sig tip pois dt dia rat PURPOSE The command is used to define and assign the PY TZ QZ codes skin friction parameters and tip resistance parameters to the soil profile The data are used when creating the GENSOD input file The Z level may be given by node selection or be manual input
216. members according to specified names NO to end name list SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 15 NOTES Assigned hydrodynamic values may be labelled by use of the command LABEL CONCEPT ATTRIBUTES HYDRODYNAMIC Hydrodynamic coefficients will be changed overwritten by a new ASSIGN command See also LABEL CONCEPT ATTRIBUTES Preframe SESAM 5 16 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 ASSIGN PILE DATA FIXED TO node select option DENSITY FLUID dens concept select PILE DATA STIFFNESS MODIFIER ea el ga gip concept select TIP CODE tip Select option YIELD STRENGTH yield concept select where the concept select alternatives are ASSEMBLY CONCEPT Select option ELEMENT where the select option alternatives are ALL BY ELEMENT BY NAME PURPOSE The command assigns concept attributes to the selected pile concepts or part of concept PARAMETERS FIXED TO DENSITY FLUID Assign pile group fixed to node reference Assign unit density of fluid soil inside the pile STIFFNESS MODIFIER Assign element stiffness modifier data TIP CODE YIELD STRENGTH ASSEMBLY CONCEPT ELEMENT ALL Assign pile tip boundary condition code Assign pile material yield strength Assign attribute to complete assembly currently not in use Assign attribute to whole pile concept parent
217. ment numbers The command will then not request node and element numbers An eccentricity of the element to split is maintained by positioning the new node on the eccentric element before after the new node is positioned on the eccentric element the two new elements will therefore have no eccentricity in this node Figure 5 7 K bracing when eccentricity EXAMPLES Example of command for generating a K bracing GENERATE BEAM BEAS K BRACING 200 2090 10 03 105 11 15 16 END END 201 211 before WHRBEO RU OWVIVOFHOG WIH HG R HP HW P Figure 5 8 K bracing created by GENERATE command Preframe SESAM 5 84 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 GENERATE eltyp LINE LINE nodel node2 ndiv nodeno elno EVEN STEP first node node step STEP first element element step space AUTO AUTO PURPOSE The command creates nodes and elements distributed along a straight line between two existing nodes The direction defines the local x axis of the line is from nodel to node2 PARAMETERS nodel node2 ndiv nodeno elno STEP first node node step first element element step AUTO EVEN space NOTES The two existing nodes defining the line segment Number of divisions of the line segment ndiv 1 number of nodes and ndiv ele ments will be created Node numbers of the created nodes Eac
218. mode the plots may be generated without any display on the screen if the command SET GRAPHIC DEVICE DUMMY is added to the journal file prior to the first display command By default the options are OFF SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 225 SET MODEL FILE NEW sup el no OLD MODEL FILE prefix filnam PURPOSE The command closes the current model file and opens another model file without exiting and re entering the program PARAMETERS prefix File name prefix filnam File name given without the file extension NEW A new model file will be created OLD An old model file will be opened sup el n Superelement number Preframe SESAM 5 226 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 SET NUMBERING AUTOMATIC ON OFF OLD SYSTEM NEW SYSTEM NUMBERING AUTOMATIC PURPOSE The command switches on and off automatic numbering of nodes and elements created I e rather than prompting the user for numbers during creation of nodes and elements the program selects the numbers itself The effect of the command will be the same as if the default node element number is chosen when single nodes elements are created and the AUTO option is chosen when several nodes elements are created Nodes and element numbers created by a COPY command are based on an increment of 100 for both the node and element numbers The program will log commands as if the OFF option is chosen Th
219. n any other way until the Return key has been hit or until the typed text has been deleted by backspace SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 1 5 COMMAND DESCRIPTION The hierarchical structure of the commands and numerical data is documented in this chapter by use of tables How to interpret these tables is explained below Examples are used to illustrate how the command structure may diverge into multiple choices and converge to a single choice In the example below command A is followed by either of the commands B and C Thereafter command D is given Legal alternatives are therefore AB D and A C D B A D C In the example below command A is followed by three selections of either of commands B and C as indi cated by 3 For example A B B B or A B BC or A C BC etc B A 3 C In the example below the three dots in the left most column indicate that the command sequence is a contin uation of a preceding command sequence The single asterisk indicate that B and C may be given any number of times Conclude this sequence by the command END The three dots in the right most column indicate that the command sequence is to be continued by another command sequence B A C END In the example below command A is followed by any number of repetitions of either of the sequences B D and C D Note that a pair of braces is used here merely to de
220. n set to ON elements cre ated by the GENERATE command i e jacket structure line of elements T brace K brace and X brace and the SPLIT command will automatically be assigned alignment attributes PARAMETERS ON The automatic alignment is switched on OFF The automatic alignment is switched off This is the default condition NOTES If the node in one end of aligned elements moves then all intermediate nodes will be moved to keep the ele ments on a straight line Also if the first or last element is given an eccentricity then all intermediate ele ments will be given necessary eccentricities to keep the elements on a straight line SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 205 SET ASSIGN OPTION MANUAL NUMBERING ON SECTION NUMBER OFF ASSIGN OPTION PURPOSE The command is used to switch ON OFF how to handle input alternatives regarding node element and sec tion numbers in connection with the ASSIGN CAN STUB CONE SEGMENT command The user may switch these options ON and OFF during the session PARAMETERS MANUAL NUMBERING Node and element number for created node and element given by user SECTION NUMBER Give section number instead of PIPE section geometry data to be connected to created element ON Switch option on OFF Switch option off NOTES See also Section 3 6 1 regarding the ASSIGN OPTION switches By default the options are OFF Preframe SESAM 5 206 10 S
221. nd and consequently no PROPERTY CONNECT command is required PARAMETERS eltyp See Table 5 1 above GROUP Create a group of elements as explained in the following pages LINE Create a straight line of elements as explained in the following pages nodel node2 Nodes defining the straight line segment alternatively the two nodes of the single two node element to create elno Number of the single one node element to create nodeno Node to which the one node element is connected NOTES Two node elements may be created individually as a group of elements or as a straight line of elements between two extreme nodes One node elements SPRING and DAMPER TO GROUND may only be created individually The number of d o f s of a node depends on the types of element connected to it The number of d o f s of a node is determined by the element with the highest number of d o f s and if this number is 1 or 2 it will be increased to 3 and if 4 or 5 it will be increased to 6 The reason for this increase is that the analysis pro grams SESTRA will only accept 3 or 6 d o f s in a node Existing elements can be changed to be connected to other nodes by the CHANGE ELEMENT command The element type cannot be changed The number of an element can be changed by the RENUMBER command Elements created may be deleted by the DELETE command The size of the one node element symbols are by default 20 mm on the plot The size may be modified by the SET
222. new element is taken from the coordinate system of the previously created element elnor as follows The X Y Z axes of elnor corre sponds to the X Y X Z X Y or Y Z X axes of the new element elno The transfor mation from the global coordinate system to the local coordinate system of X Y the new element is stored as a new transformation with reference number newtrano TRANSFORMATION The coordinate system of the new element is the global coordinate system trans formed with the previously defined transformation number oldtrano Preframe SESAM 5 66 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 EXAMPLES ELEMENT BEAM GROUP 11 41 10 101 111 100 See Figure 5 3 the new elements 11 through 41 with step of 10 are created within the previously created group of nodes 101 through 411 The element type is BEAM and the nodes of the first element 11 is 101 and 111 The elements need not be in the same plane as in this case O 41 14 01 31 44 a j 14 101 44 JAA Figure 5 3 Creating an ELEMENT GROUP SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 67 ELEMENT LINE BEAM TRUSS NONSTRUCTURAL BEAM AXI AL SPRING AXIAL DAMPER GENERAL SPRING and SHIM ELE MENT elno LINE nodel node2 STEP first element element step coord sys AUTO where coord sys is relevant only for the GENERAL SPRING and SHIM ELEMENT and is GLOBAL X Y Z LOCAL elnor Z X Y newtrano Y Z X TRANSFORMATION oldt
223. ng of nodes and elements a default increment of 100 will be used But this increment was used to create axis B so the numbers are taken Proceed by giving increments 200 for both nodes and elements SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 A 3 Click display button All middle column of commands to display the current model Define all beam elements in Y direction of cellar deck i e along axes 2 3 and 4 as well as in between Element Line Split beam elements along axes 2 and 3 in three equally long elements using the SPLIT ELEMENT WISE command axes 3 and 4 Use the ELEMENT BEAM LINE command or button Define beam elements in X direction between axes 2 and 3 using the ELEMENT BEAM command Figure A 2 The dimensions of the module frame Define the beam cross sections given in Figure A 3 Use the PROPERTY CONNECT SECTION command to assign section numbers to beam elements of the cellar deck Refer to Figure A 3 Use the LINE option to select all elements between two nodes Introduce eccentricities for all beams with section 9 I beam with height 1 0 so that their tops flush with beams with sections and 2 boxes with heights 1 6 The eccentricity will be half of the difference in section heights 1 6 1 0 2 0 3 Use the command PROPERTY ECCENTRICITY BY SECTION 9 NO GLOBAL 0 0 0 0 0 3 GLOBAL 0 0 0 0 0 3 Preframe A 4 10 SEP 2004 SESAM Program version 6 9 Introduce eccentricities for all beam
224. nify the part of the picture that is inside the zoom area ZOOM OUT will fit the picture into the zoom area F lt zoom area Figure 5 33 The effect of the ZOOM command Preframe SESAM 5 248 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 ncomnd ALL PURPOSE The command reads commands from the command input file The command input file is opened by the command SET COMMAND INPUT FILE The command input file can either be a command log file from a previous run or a file prepared by a text editor The program will execute commands from the command input file until e an end of file is detected e a is found on the file ncomnd number of commands have been read or e an erroneous command sequence is found A command loop is taken as a single command in this context For example 1 will read the command defining all three nodes from the file below and 2 will read the whole file NODE 101 0 0 0 102 10 0 0 103 10 10 0 ELEMENT BEAM 11 101 102 12 102 103 PARAMETERS ncomnd Number of commands to be read from the command input file ALL Read all commands from the command input file NOTES See also note in connection with the command SET COMMAND INPUT FILE SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 A 1 APPENDIX A TUTORIAL EXAMPLES The following tutorial examples are presented 1 Modelling a module frame
225. ning with 5 They can be written as 5im1 where iis as above a two digit number identifying the elevation number and m is a two digit number identifying the conductor 01 02 03 etc Notice that all element numbers have 1 or 2 as last digits to allow for new element numbers to be inserted in between SESAM Program version 6 9 HDY 50401150402 50301 50302 HDY 503017 50302 A 5020 50202 HDY 502011 30202 FROGXFWWU 10 SEP 2004 Preframe 5 81 Figure 5 6 Illustration of the node and element numbering system and local x axis direction Preframe SESAM 5 82 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 GENERATE eltyp K BRACING K BRACING nodel node2 element rel pos nodeno elno 3 STEP first element element step AUTO AUTO PURPOSE The command creates an K bracing by splitting an existing element into two new elements and connecting the new node with two other nodes See Figure 5 7 The element number of the element being split is given to the one of the two new replacing elements that is connected to end 1 of the original element see NOTES below on how to determine which end is end 1 Therefore three new element numbers are required and one new node number PARAMETERS nodel node2 First and second node element Element number to split rel pos Relative position of the new node along the element to split measured from end 1 of the
226. nodes in which case an interpolation is performed PARAMETERS nodel node2 DISTANCE dist nodeno XY PLANE INTERSECTION z value YZ PLANE INTERSECTION x value ZX PLANE INTERSECTION y value EXAMPLES NODE EXTRAPOLATION 22 24 DISTANCE 21 23 YZ PLAN First and second node defining the line Position the node at a given distance from node2 The distance from node2 to nodeno A positive value is meas ured in the direction away from nodel Number of the node to create Position the node at the intersection between the line and the given XY plane Z coordinate defining the XY plane Position the node at the intersection between the line and the given YZ plane X coordinate defining the YZ plane Position the node at the intersection between the line and the given ZX plane Y coordinate defining the ZX plane 5 27 E INTERSECTION 10 26 SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 SERA AL or Ser i i Z ec ee ko ae X lt SAH GHIQGE Figure 5 13 Creating a node by NODE EXTRAPOLATION Preframe SESAM 5 122 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 NODE GROUP GROUP nodel node2 nstep refnod refstep dx dy dz PURPOSE The command creates a group of nodes relative to previously created nodes PARAMETERS nodel Node number of the first node to be created node2 Node number of the last node to be created nstep Step in the node numbering
227. o avoid conflict in numbers between the different eleva tions 4 Complete the modelling for each elevation i e model the parts that differ between the elevations and therefore cannot be copied How to model structural joint strengthening and conical transitions Add structural joint strengthening sections cans stubs by use of the command ASSIGN CAN and ASSIGN STUB Add insert conical transitions to a member by use of the command ASSIGN CONE Update joints with brace eccentricities due to minimum gap by use of the command CHANGE JOINT lt select nodes gt GAP PLANEWISE Update can and stub lengths due to change in joint lay out by use of the command CHANGE JOINT lt select nodes gt CAN STUB LENGTH How to assign conceptual attributes Use the ASSIGN STABILITY command to add member stability parameters buckling length and effective length factor The stability parameters will be read by FRAMEWORK Use the ASSIGN HYDRODYNAMIC command to add hydrodynamic properties Cd Cm flooding to the member concepts The hydrodynamic properties will be read by WAJAC The flooding parameter will also be read by FRAMEWORK 3 2 5 Element Types The element types that may be created are see also Table 5 3 on page 5 66 BEAM BEAS Two node beam element A linear elastic material must be defined and assigned con nected to the element The element also requires a cross sec tion and a local coordinate system TRUSS TESS Two node tr
228. o stiffness in the third translational di rection and no stiffness for the three rotational d o f s The element is typically used to couple a node of an element and a node of a guide when the element is free to move in axial direction through the guide A shim element material must be defined and assigned connected to the element General two node spring element with stiffness in all six d o f s A general spring material must be defined and assigned con nected to the element Presently not in use An eccentricity or offset is in effect an infinitely stiff coupling between a node and a beam end Eccentricities offsets may be defined for beam truss and non structural beam elements by the PROP ERTY ECCENTRICITY command Note that the PROPERTY GAP and CHANGE JOINT select nodes GAP PLANEWISE commands also introduce eccentricities see Section 3 6 3 If new eccentricities are to be defined using the PROPERTY ECCENTRICITY command for elements that already have been given eccentricities under a PROPERTY GAP command you must first delete the current eccentricities using the DELETE ECCENTRICITY command The eccentricity is given as a vector in the global local or transformed coordinate system and pointing from the node towards the element end see Figure 3 6 Preframe SESAM 3 16 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 eccentricity node wee beam end Figure 3 6 Eccentricity or offset is given as a vector from node to element en
229. of analyses SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 187 HZ o i NAY de Figure 5 24 Double bottom section Preframe 5 188 SESAM 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 PROPERTY SECTION sctno GENERAL sctno GENERAL area ix iy iz iyz wxmin wymin wzmin_ shary sharz shceny shcenz sy sz PURPOSE The command defines a general section All sectional data are defined directly The following should be noted For beams the area and moments of inertia are required while only the area is required for trusses The product of inertia I is zero for all bi symmetrical sections YZ y The minimum sectional moduli Wxmin Wymin and Wzmin are required by the FRAMEWORK post processor for calculating stresses in the sections e Shear deformations will not be accounted for if the shear areas are zero The shear centre location must be specified if the shear centre does not coincide with the element axis The static area moments are used in connection with un symmetrical sections TY Z0 to re compute sec tion values to the principal axis PARAMETERS sctno area iyz wxmin wymin wzmin shary sharz shceny Section reference number Cross sectional area gt 0 0 Torsional moment of inertia about shear centre gt 0 0 Moment of inertia about y axis gt 0 0 Mom
230. of blue symbols illustrates the boundary conditions applied see the LABEL command for details ORIGIN SYMBOL adds the origin in its correct position to the display PLOT generates a plot file of the last display or of the complete model The plot file should be sent to a plotter or laser printer ROTATE rotates the display of the model The SET GRAPHICS EYE DIRECTION command is an alternative com mand for changing the view point SET GRAPHICS sets and defines various control parameters for the DISPLAY PLOT and LABEL commands AUTO The display will automatically be updated when new nodes and elements are added this is default for graphical user interface DEVICE sets the proper type of graphics device EYE DIRECTION sets the desired view point HIDDEN switches to hidden mode INPUT switches between line mode relevant for workstations only and graphical user interface PRESENTATION sets the desired draw mode for tubular beam elements facet silhouette or wire frame the last one is the default In Figure 3 17 the wire frame mode is used In Figure 3 21 the silhouette mode is shown The wire frame mode is suitable for displaying the complete model while the silhouette mode is suit able for a plane showing the sizes of the pipes The facet mode is suitable for details and it also used in the DISPLAY JOINT command SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SE
231. of nodes to be created refnod First reference node i e the coordinates of nodel will be defined relative to refnod refstep Step in the reference node numbering i e the coordinates of node node1 nstep will be defined relative to node refnod refstep All reference nodes must previously have been created dx dy dz The relative position of the new nodes with respect to the corresponding reference node The coordinates must be specified in the global coordinate system EXAMPLES NODE GROUP 21 26 1 11 1 0 10 0 See Figure 5 14 the new nodes 21 through 26 are created based on the existing group of nodes 11 through 16 The node numbering step is 1 for both the new nodes and the reference nodes The relative positions of the new nodes with respect to the corresponding reference nodes are given as the vector 0 10 0 ol gt ol Figure 5 14 Creating a NODE GROUP SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 123 NODE INTERSECTION INTERSECTION nodel node2 node3 node4 nodeno PURPOSE The command creates a node at the point of intersection of two straight lines Each line is defined by two nodes that previously must have been created PARAMETERS nodel node2 First and second node defining the first line node3 node4 First and second node defining the second line nodeno Number of the node to create EXAMPLES NODE INTERSECTION 11 15 12 14 13 21 22 23 24 25 See Figure 5 15
232. of the beam element according to the centre of gravity of the load Preframe SESAM 5 38 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 CHANGE NODE GROUP INTERSECTION LINE ROTATE TRANSLATE NODE nodeno PURPOSE The command changes nodal coordinates Except for the ROTATE and TRANSLATE alternatives the command is very similar to the command for creating nodes NODE see this The ROTATE and TRANSLATE alternatives are therefore described in more detail in the following NOTES Changing a node position after having defined the local coordinate system of an element may lead to error see Section 3 3 3 See also DELETE NODE DISPLAY NODE LABEL NODE NUMBERS LABEL NODE SYMBOLS LOAD NODE NODE PRINT NODE RENUMBER NODE SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 39 CHANGE NODE ROTATE ROTATE trano select nodes PURPOSE The command rotates selected nodes thereby changing their coordinates If all nodes are selected this is equivalent to making the transformed coordinate system trano the new global coordinate system See also Section 3 10 1 PARAMETERS trano Reference number of the transformed coordinate system defined by the TRANS FORMATION command select nodes Select elements see Section 5 1 NOTES Warning Boundary conditions and loads are not rotated Note Do not use CHANG
233. ofile layer divisions The command is split into definition of SAND or CLAY PARAMETERS SAND Define the soil type number as sand CLAY Define the soil type number as clay num Soil type number gamtot Total unit weight phi Angle of internal friction degrees suz0 Un drained shear strength at z 0 suz100 Un drained shear strength at z 100 epsc Strain at half of maximum stress ocr Over consolidation ratio api j J factor for API code open Code for open gap 0 or 1 r p rat Residual peak skin friction ratio tzzres T Z curve z displacement from peak to residual skin friction NOTES This command may also be used to modify existing data See also the Gensod User Manual for specific soil related explanation Preframe SESAM 5 198 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 RE DISPLAY RE DISPLAY PURPOSE The command displays the same picture apart from labels as the last DISPLAY command SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 199 READ READ prefix filnam sup el no PURPOSE The command reads an Input Interface File describing a FE model into Preframe Provided no errors occur during reading the model may be modified by commands available in Preframe and an updated Input Inter face File may be generated by the WRITE command The Input Interface File which must be a first level superelement may have been generated by preproces sors other than Preframe Preframe will
234. oil and Piles The modelling procedure is as follows 1 Generate the jacket structure Global Z axis pointing upwards 2 Define the soil data i e Mudline level Soil types sand clay Soil profile soil types and layer divisions Skin friction and tip resistance data PY TZ and QZ codes 3 Generate the piles Generate piles based on soil profile or user given segment lengths and number of elements Add necessary pile data attributes i e yield strength tip code fixed to node reference when pile groups density of fluid inside piles 4 By use of the WRITE command create the SESAM Input Interface File The superelement containing the piles must be number 1 i e T1 FEM Gensod input template file Splice input template file The Preframe commands for generating the model including soil data and piles are given in the following Preframe SESAM A 12 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 Figure A 5 4 legged jacket with piles UNITS kN m g 9 81 m s2 1 Generate the jacket structure PROPERTY SECTION T PURE V2 5 00 160 20 2 PLPE 6 025 1 0 10 3 PIPE 0 02 0 2 0 Section 4 is used for piles SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 A 13 4 PIPE 1 1 05 1 0 1 0 o PROPERTY MATERIAL 1 LINEAR ELASTIC 210 E 06 0 3 7 85 0 0 0 12E 04 END Material 2 used for piles density 6 93 tonnes m3
235. olumns ELEMENT BEAM 36 1 1001 3 3 1003 38 2 1002 39 101 1101 40 103 1103 41 102 1102 42 201 1201 43 203 1203 44 202 1202 45 1 1003 46 2 1003 47 2 1102 48 202 1102 49 202 1203 50 201 1203 51 201 1101 52 1 1101 53 3 1103 54 203 1103 Ao AS Connect sections to braces and columns PROPERTY CONNECT SECTION 3 38 44 NO 4 37 43 45 46 50 49 NO 5 36 42 NO 6 47 41 48 53 40 54 52 39 51 NO o o Change local z axis for braces in axes A and B PROPERTY LOCAL COORDINATE ZX PLANE Y GLOBAL INFINITY 45 46 50 49 NO T o o Define load case 1 gravity LOAD 1 GRAVITY YES 0 0 0 0 9 81 END o o Load case 2 is vertical horizontal load in X direction LOAD 2 ELEMENT POINT 1029 1031 NO GLOBAL 2000 0 0 0 15000 0 END 0 6667 POINT 1022 1023 NO GLOBAL 2000 0 0 0 15000 0 END 8 0 END END END Ao Preframe SESAM A 10 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 Load case 3 is vertical horizontal load in X direction LOAD 3 ELEMENT POINT 1029 1031 NO GLOBAL 2000 0 0 0 15000 0 END 0 6667 POINT 1022 1023 NO GLOBAL 2000 0 0 0 15000 0 END 8 0 END END END oO o Load case 4 is distributed load on main deck of 5 kN m2 The load is applied as element distributed load on HE beams LOAD 4 ELEMENT DISTRIBUTED 1032 1033 1101 1034 1035 NO GLOBAL 0 0 0 0 22 0 END 0 0 0
236. on the pile name will be Pxxxxx where xxxxx is the node number of the reference node When using the ONE BY ONE option the default proposed pile name is Pxxxxx Nodes and elements forming a pile will be assigned the following node and element numbers 900000 100 n xxxxx where xxxxx is the node number of the reference node and n runs from 0 to N 1 where N is total number of nodes elements generated to represent the pile In addition to the reference node given when creating the pile concepts a pile head node will be defined The pile head node will get an offset equal to 1 100 of the pile outer diameter from the reference node Do not connect a section PROPERTY CONNECT SECTION later in the design process with smaller outer diameter than the original diameter Test routines in Splice will then fail The piles are not allowed to interfere with other parts off the structure When creating pile groups remember to assign the fixed to node attribute i e the node to which all piles in the pile group shall be rigidly connected see command ASSIGN PILE DATA FIXED TO The fixed to node reference used for pile group must have equal Z coordinate as the pile heads A pile segment is a part of a pile where all elements forming the segment have equal section number and material number Each element within a pile segment have equal length length seglen nofelem All elements belonging to a pile are automatically assigned ali
237. on 1 Figure 3 5 Jacket model created by GENERATE command SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 3 13 How to model conductors as a separate superelement When creating conductors by the GENERATE BEAM JACKET command you may alternatively only cre ate the nodes Combined with the automatically defined set named CONDUCT this feature may be used to create the jacket and conductor superelements in a very efficient way Do this as follows 1 Generate the jacket superelement a Use the GENERATE BEAM JACKET command to create the jacket and for the conductors select only nodes to be created b Define the conductor nodes as supernodes by referring to the set CONDUCT within the BOUND ARY command 2 Generate the conductor superelement remember to change the superelement number a Generate a new jacket using the same input as above only replacing the NODES ONLY option with BEAMS or NONSTRUCTURAL BEAM as desired Also remember to assign section numbers to the conductors b Define a set containing all nodes except for the nodes contained in the set CONDUCT This is done by the command DEFINE SET NOTCOND UNION NODE ALL SUBTRACT BY NODE SET CONDUCT NO END c Delete all nodes and elements except for the conductors This is done by deleting the set of nodes named NOTCOND deleting nodes also deletes elements connected to the ndoes DELETE NODE SET NOTCOND NO d Define all nodes as supernodes or all nodes belonging to the set COND
238. on 5 1 SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 165 PROPERTY ECCENTRICITY GLOBAL LOCAL elno ex ey jez 2 TRANSFORMATION trano ECCENTRICITY select elements ma PURPOSE The command defines eccentricities offsets for selected elements The eccentricities are defined for the two element ends Eccentricities can be changed by the CHANGE ECCENTRICITY command or by this command and deleted by the DELETE ECCENTRICITY command PARAMETERS select elements Select elements see Section 5 1 GLOBAL The offset values refer to the global coordinate system LOCAL The offset values refer to a local coordinate system elno The local coordinate system to be applied belongs to element elno TRANSFORMED The transformed coordinate system to be applied belongs to transformation trano trano ex ey ez The offset values at the end given as a vector from the node to the beam end NOTES Introducing eccentricities for an element for which a local coordinate system has previously been defined using the PROPERTY LOCAL COORDINATE command will lead to error if the eccentricity involves changing the direction of the local x axis This because the local y and z axes have been fixed by the PROPERTY LOCAL COORDINATE command and changing the x axis will then give a non cartesian coordinate system Printing the local coordinate system for the element will reveal this by a remark ERR O
239. on 6 9 C MISC 3 CONVERGENCE FACTOR DISPL NEXT OLD F NEW 1 F F MISC3 100 C MISC 4 CONVERGENCE FACTOR FORCS NEXT OLD F NEW 1 F F MISC4 100 C MISC 5 CONVERGENCE FACTOR STENS NEXT OLD F NEW 1 F F MISC5 100 C MISC 6 0 COMPUTE NEW SOIL DISPL DUE TO GROUP EFFECTS AFTER EACH ITERTN E 1 COMPUTE SOIL DISPL ONCE ONLY SHOULD SECURE CONVERGENCE C MISC 7 1 PRINT INCR DSP AND FRC TO SCREEN AFTER EACH ITERATION C MISC 8 1 PRINT STIFFNESS VALUES TO SCREEN AFTER EACH ITERATION C MISC 9 9 PRINT PROGRAM CONTROL FLOW TO SCREEN C MISC 9 8 SKIP AUTOMATIC DIVERGENCE CHECK C MISC 10 NPND TRACE PRINT OF VALUES FOR NODE ND ON PILE NP TO SCREEN C MISC 11 NF DETAILED ELEMENT DATA TRACE SAVED ON UNIT NF END OF SPLICE INPUT FILE A3 Result of CHANGE JOINT sel nodes GAP PLANEWISE The following pages shows some examples of the resulting element eccentricities after use of the CHANGE JOINT sel nodes GAP PLANEWISE command YT joint The brace closest to the perpendicular to the chord will not be moved i e eccentricities will be applied to the Y brace to obtain the given gap value SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 A 21 Figure A 7 YT joint KT jo
240. on non nico nan n cnn ron ron eS aet 5 221 SET GRAPHICS SIZE SYMBOLS cccccsssssssessesseeseesecsecesesaeeseeseseecesecsecseseseeseaeeseeseeeeesessseeaes 5 222 SETJOURNAELIN Gima aia 5 224 SET MODEL FILE cccceccesssssssssescescesecseeseessecseceecssessesseseecnaessesseseesescesessessusensesseaesaasaeeenseaseass 5 225 SET NUMBERING AUTOMATIC cccccccsssscssesseesseeesecesesseeseeseseecesecsecseceseeseascsecseeseeseseasaes 5 226 SE TPO A td St ds aia 5 228 SETPRIN Dar all ae 5 230 SET PRINT DESTINATION cccccccsccssceseesecseesecesceseesceseeeeeesessecaecsseeseesesseceseeaecseseeseeseeseasensenes 5 231 SET PRINT BUBB ad les Ln di 5 232 SET PRINFEORMA Teclea endo do do haa Mh ok hae hae 5 233 SET PRINEPAGESIZE A A tiara 5 234 SET PRINT TABLE NODE BOUNDARY TABLE ooooocccooocnncnonnnnnononnncnonnnnnonnnnncnonnnnnnnnnnnncnonoss 5 235 SET SOIE PROFITLE X Yoco A A a dae 5 236 SET UNIT VECTOR TOLERANCE 000 5 237 SET WRITE MODE 0 a fdas Mates dads abd ada 5 238 SP OE 5 239 SPLIT ELEMENT WISE ccccccccsessessessessececesecsecsceeseeseesecesesaeesesseseecesecsecsesesesecsecseeeeseeeeasenaenee 5 240 SPL ITINODE WISE 224 itches e Me Pete eee en a eh ee 5 242 TRANSFORMATION Gi A arsine Sebel as ead eae cena 5 243 WRITE a a is pai 5 244 WRITE GENSOD SPLICE TEMPLATE ccccccssesssessessceseeseeseeeeeeeceseeseeseeseeeeeeseesecaseeaeeaeeaeenees 5 246 ZOOM ta doi ita 5 247 A A A iS 5 248 APPENDIX A TUTORIAL EXAMPLES 00
241. original diameter Test routines in Splice will then fail The piles are not allowed to interfere with other parts off the structure When creating pile groups remember to assign the fixed to node attribute 1 e the node to which all piles in the pile group shall be rigidly connected see command ASSIGN PILE DATA FIXED TO The fixed to node reference used for pile group must have equal Z coordinate as the pile heads All elements belonging to a pile are automatically assigned alignment attributes i e if the node in the pile tip is moved all intermediate nodes will be moved to keep the elements forming the pile on a straight line A tip Use separate material number s for the piles The yield strength ref command ASSIGN PILE DATA YIELD STRENGTH assigned to the pile concepts will in Framework be assigned to the material number connected to the pile elements Preframe SESAM 5 90 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 GENERATE eltyp T BRACING T BRACING node element nodeno elno 2 STEP first element element step AUTO AUTO PURPOSE The command creates a T bracing by projecting an existing node onto an existing element splitting the ele ment into two new elements and creating a new element connecting the existing node with the new node See Figure 5 9 The element number of the element being split is given to the one of the two new replacing elements that is connec
242. ow is principally the same on PC Windows and Unix On PC there are also a print window and a message win dow Print requested by the user appears in the print window whereas various program messages appear in the message window Figure 3 1 illustrates the three Preframe windows on a PC Graphic mode window Print window Message window Figure 3 1 The Preframe windows on PC On Unix there is only a line mode window in addition to the graphic mode window I e the print and mes sage windows are replaced by a line mode window where print requested by the user as well as program messages appear The line mode window is also where line mode input is entered if you do not use the graphical user interface see Section 4 1 4 on this Preframe offers two modes of input and both are available in the graphic mode window Line mode input i e typing commands and data using the keyboard e Graphic mode input i e selecting commands by clicking the left mouse button LMB A sketch of the graphic mode window is shown in Figure 3 2 together with explanations of the six different areas How to use the areas is explained in more detail in the following You may at this stage decide to read about how to create nodes and elements Go then to Section 3 2 and use the explanations of the areas of the graphic mode window below for reference SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 3 3 click left mouse
243. owing appearance SUPER ELEMENT TYPE 1 LEVEL 1 EXT INT EL MAT SECT SECT SECT ELEMENT LENGTH EL EL TYPE NO NO TYPE D H TH FLEXIBLE PART NODE 1 NODE 2 101 1 BEAS 4 2 CHAN 4 00 5 459192 101 201 111 9 BEAS 4 4 BOX 7 00 5 459198 105 205 234 130 AXIS 6 29 791088 304 206 235 131 AXDA 7 29 791090 308 206 732 57 TESS 4 11 PIPE 12 00 10 000000 704 706 1020 15 PILS 99 99 GEN 105 9004 127 GSPR 2 104 9005 129 GDAM 55 105 9008 128 GSPR 3 108 columns of the table give from left to right user defined external element number internal element number the first element created is number 1 the last is number NEL where NEL is the number of basic elements this number is normally of no interest to the user basic element type see Section 5 1 for an overview of the element types that Preframe may create other element types with other names may have been created by other preprocessors and read into Preframe by the READ command number of material connected to the element number of cross section connected to the element type of cross section connected to the element primary cross section parameter diameter height or thickness flexible element length refer to possible eccentricities if two node element user defined external numbers of the nodes the element is connected to the nodes of elements with more than two nodes are g
244. planation of the parame ters SHARY modified SHARY program SfY SHARZ modified SHARZ program S Z z A e BT gt HZ Figure 5 21 Bar section SESAM Program version 6 9 Preframe 10 SEP 2004 5 183 PROPERTY SECTION sctno BOX sctno BOX by tt ty tb sfy sfz PURPOSE The command defines a box cross section PARAMETERS sctn hz by tt ty tb sfy sfz Section reference number Height Width Thickness of top flange Thickness of webs vertical walls Thickness of bottom flange Factors modifying the shear areas calculated by the program The modified shear an are see the PRINT SECTION command for an explanation of the parame SHARY modified SHARY program x sfy SHARZ modified SHARZ program x sfz AZ TT y A i Z e HZ TB i Y Figure 5 22 Box section Preframe SESAM 5 184 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 PROPERTY SECTION sctno CHANNEL sctno CHANNEL hz by tz ty sfy sfz Lo NEGATIVE PURPOSE The command defines a channel cross section PARAMETERS sctn Section reference number hz Height by Width of top and bottom flanges tz Thickness of top and bottom flanges ty Thickness of web sfy sfz Factors modifying the shear areas calculated by the program The modified shear areas are see the PRINT SECTION command for an explanation of the p
245. ps as follows Present e Wirefram Beams are displayed as lines wireframe model Silhouet Beams are displayed as silhouettes Facetted Beams are displayed in facet mode i e as solid objects Display e Joint Display a selected joint in 3 D with intersection lines e Plane Display a selected plane of the model i e all nodes and elements in a plane e Foot Display the foot print of a joint All Display all nodes and elements of the model Soil On Add display of the soil profile Soil Off Remove display of the soil profile Generate Line Generate a line i e create nodes and elements along a line between two existing nodes e Jacket Generate a whole jacket K brace Generate a K bracing T brace Generate a T bracing X brace Generate an X bracing Pile Generate piles Pile lt soi Generate piles based on an existing soil model Element e Line Create elements along a line of existing nodes SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 3 5 Node Line Create nodes along a line between two existing nodes Label Elem Num Add element numbers to the display Node Num Add node numbers to the display Sect Num Add section numbers to the display Matr Num Add material numbers to the display Mem Nam Add member names to the display Pile Nam Add pile names to the display Soil Typ Add soil t
246. purpose of importing SESAM plots into reports Contrary to CGM PostScript is an ASCII formatted file and is therefore more easily transferred from one computer make to another Note that a word processor will normally recognise only one picture display on each file You should therefore specify a new file name for each plot command using SET PLOT FILE command 4 1 7 Background Execution On Unix the user may find it convenient to execute Preframe as a background job rather than as an interac tive session Here is a proposal for how to do this This proposal is not relevant for executing Preframe through Manager in which case background execution is controlled by Manager Execute Preframe in the background as follows SESAM Program version 6 9 Preframe 10 SEP 2004 4 7 e Prepare a file e g a revision of a previous command log file containing the input data let the name of the file be FILE_IN JNL e Prepare a file with the following contents the entries FILE and FILE_IN are example file names and sup el no is the desired superelement number r T FILE NEW sup el no SET COMMAND INPUT FILE FILE _ ALL EXIT The two apostrophes in the first line enclose a blank space it may also be a blank line to specify a void prefix If a prefix is given e g PREFIX it will precede the given command input file name requiring the full name of the file containing the input data to be PREFIXFILE_IN JNL
247. que all superelements belonging to the same model should have the same file prefix If the above file superelement 5 is one of several files of a superelement model then all Input Interface Files should be named ABCT FEM where is the superelement number SESAM Program version 6 9 PREFEM general structures PRETUBE tubular joints 35 6 BOs ma BRN Sn SANZ 10 SEP 2004 ENVIRONMENTAL LOADS LOADS INTERFACE FILE STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS Preframe 2 7 Legend 1 First level superelement 2 Second level superelement 2 Second and higher level superelement As indicated by the illustration 35 0 SURGXFAV ZUW D TIDWIYEOVXSH HPP HIW 35 5 0 SURGXFAV ZUW D IWON WSHHDP HIWEXWEFDO DOR WG D IUWOYND VSHHM P HW 35 78 A SURGXFAV ZUW RH RU WYHDO IUWONYED VSHHM P HIW DRG DOR D ROG GYEDVK SHHPP HMEHQ DO DWP EO RI DOULUWOAYANXSHHDP HXW 35 6 UAX IDW OY WX SHHPP HW DMG SURGXFHV ZUW WEROG DOG KI KHJ OYK VSHPP HW EH QY DWP EOHV RI IOWONYHOVXSHHPP HIW Figure 2 1 Interface between SESAM preprocessors and analysis programs 2 5 1 Writing and Optimising the Input Interface File Whether or not to write the Input Interface File is normally controlled by Manager If you want to produce the file you should check the appropriate box prior to starting Preframe The Input Interface File is then automatically written when you exit Preframe using the command EXIT This makes the command WRIT
248. ram version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 119 NODE nodeno EXTRAPOLATION GROUP NODE _ INTERSECTION LINE RELATIVE END PURPOSE The command creates nodes in different ways a single node defined by its number and coordinates a single node extrapolated shot out along a line through two existing nodes a group of nodes defined relative to previously created nodes a single node at the point of intersection of two straight lines through existing nodes a line of nodes distributed along a straight line segment between two previously created nodes and a single node positioned relative by offset to an existing node Existing nodes can be given new positions coordinates by the CHANGE NODE command The node numbers can be changed by the RENUMBER command Created nodes can be deleted by the DELETE command See Section 2 5 for an explanation of the aspects and consequences of the node numbering NOTES Node numbers are limited to seven digits Preframe SESAM 5 120 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 NODE EXTRAPOLATION DISTANCE dist nodeno XY PLANE INTERSECTION z value nodeno EXTRAPOLATION nodel node2 YZ PLANE INTERSECTION x value nodeno ZX PLANE INTERSECTION y value nodeno PURPOSE The command creates a node extrapolated shot out along a line through two existing nodes Note that the new node may also fall between the two existing
249. rano PURPOSE The command creates two node elements between nodes positioned on a straight line segment There is no requirement to a constant step in node numbering along the line all nodes on a straight line between the two nodes defining the line segment are taken into account Figure 5 4 illustrates this PARAMETERS node node2 Nodes defining the straight line segment elno Numbers of the elements to create A number is manually assigned to each element STEP Element numbers will be generated by a step function first element Number of the first element to create element step Step in the element numbering AUTO The elements will be given numbers sequentially starting with the currently high est element number used plus one GLOBAL The coordinate system of the new element is the same as the global coordinate sys tem LOCAL The coordinate system of the new element is taken from the coordinate system of the previously created element elnor as follows The X Y Z axes of elnor corre sponds to the X Y X Z X Y or Y Z X axes of the new element elno The transfor mation from the global coordinate system to the local coordinate system of the new element is stored as a new transformation with reference number newtrano Preframe SESAM 5 68 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 TRANSFORMATION The coordinate system of the new element is the global coordinate system trans formed with the previously defined transfor
250. rately and total sum answer YES or the total sum alone answer NO are printed The load sum calculation takes into account the load types gravity nodal forces element point forces and element distributed forces The table has the following appearance X Y Z LOADCASE 5 REAL SUM OF GIVEN FORCES POSITIVE 13525371 208 1616 266 5698 NEGATIVE 19 8949 TOTAL 115 6423 208 1616 266 5698 SUM OF GIVEN MOMENTS POSITIVE 90 9959 107 7828 121 1479 NEGATIVE 2 2817 TOTAL E 88 7142 107 7828 121 1479 SUM OF MOMENTS FROM GIVEN FORCES ABOUT GLOBAL AXES POSITIVE 10490 6943 1333 7736 NEGATIVE 15041 2344 1449 0376 1187 7146 TOTAL 15041 2344 9041 6572 146 0590 SUM OF MOMENTS FROM GIVEN FORCES AND GIVEN MOMENTS POSITIVE 90 9959 10598 4775 1454 9214 NEGATIVE 15043 5156 1449 0376 1187 7146 TOTAL 14952 5205 9149 4404 267 2068 The table is repeated for any imaginary contribution to the load case s SESAM Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 PRINT LOAD load case ALL TYPES NODES ELEMENTS GRAVITY ROTATION OF STRUCTURE ss NODE FORCE select nodes NODE PRESCRIBED select nodes ELEMENT FORCE select elements ELEMENT TEMPERATURE select elements END PURPOSE Preframe 5 141 The command prints a selected set of basic loads for one load case The loads are primarily sorted by load typ
251. rce loads Delete nodal acceleration loads Delete nodal displacement loads Delete centripetal and tangential acceleration loads SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 59 DELETE PILE CONCEPT ALL ALL CONDUCTOR BY ELEMENT PILE CONCEPT ne MAIN BY NAME PILE GROUP PURPOSE The command deletes nodes and elements used in pile concepts PARAMETERS ALL All types all occurrences CONDUCTOR Only conductor piles MAIN Only main piles PILE GROUP Only piles defined as pile groups BY ELEMENT Piles containing at least one of the selected elements Select elements by use of standard select element options BY NAME Piles according to specified names NO to end name list NOTES If deleting a node or element belonging to a pile only the conceptual information connected to all elements and nodes belonging to that pile will be removed Preframe 5 60 DELETE SOIL SESAM 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 PY TZ QZ CODE NODE node DATA SKIN FRICTION Z LEVEL z level SOIL TIP RESISTANCE DISPLAY TYPE soil number PURPOSE The command deletes soil related data display type PARAMETERS DATA PY TZ QZ CODE SKIN FRICTION TIP RESISTANCE NODE node Z LEVEL z level DISPLAY TYPE soil number NOTES Delete data sets PY TZ QZ codes skin friction parameters and tip resistance pa rameters for a given Z le
252. rdinate tolerance used for deciding whether two points nodes have the same location or not and for deciding whether a node lies in a plane or on a line The coordinate tolerance is given in the same unit as the coordinates The default value is 0 1 The DISPLAY GAP LEGAL GAP and ZERO GAP options are used in the DISPLAY FOOTPRINT com mand See Section 3 16 for more details SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 203 The DISPLAY GAP option sets a new value for the display gap value e The LEGAL GAP option sets new values for the legal gap value display gap value and zero gap value Any values given for the DISPLAY GAP and ZERO GAP options are overridden The display gap value will become twice the legal gap value and the zero gap value will become the legal gap value 100 The ZERO GAP option sets a new value for the zero gap value PARAMETERS angtol Angle tolerance cotol Coordinate tolerance display gap value The value below which gaps are displayed marked with a line in the DISPLAY FOOTPRINT command Gaps larger than the specified value will not be shown legal gap value The minimum allowable gap between brace chord intersections zero gap value The gap size below which an overlap is assumed Preframe SESAM 5 204 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 SET ALIGNMENT AUTOMATIC ON OFF ALIGNMENT AUTOMATIC PURPOSE The command switches on and off automatic alignment of elements created Whe
253. rdware dependent requirements and limitations are also described Chapter 5 COMMAND DESCRIPTION explains in detail all commands of Preframe The commands and sub commands are sorted alphabetically Appendix A TUTORIAL EXAMPLES contains a couple of examples of use Appendix B THEORY contains the formulae employed by the program for computing sectional parameters for the various types of beam cross section Guidance in how to choose a consistent set of units for your analysis is also found here 1 4 Status List There exists for Preframe as for all other SESAM programs a Status List providing additional information This may be Reasons for update new version e New features Errors found and corrected e Etc To look up information in the most updated version of the Status List go to the support page of our website click the SESAM Status Lists link and log into this service Contact us for log in information SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 2 1 2 FEATURES OF PREFRAME Preframe is a specialised interactive graphic program for modelling frame structures Special features are available for efficient modelling of jacket type offshore structures 2 1 Modelling Nodes and Elements In Preframe the user creates nodes and elements using the NODE and ELEMENT commands respectively In addition to the simple creation of a single node with explicitly given coordinates it is possible to create a node relative to offse
254. re fully connected to the nodes unless hinges are defined for these elements as well wee translational hinge rotational hinge 7 Figure 3 7 Illustration of hinges for a two node beam element The use of hinges may easily lead to a singular or ill conditioned stiffness matrix unless the effect of the hinges is fully understood and accounted for The following pitfalls should be noted SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 3 17 All elements coming into a node cannot be hinged with no or very small resistance for the same d o f as this will lead to a singular stiffness matrix no stiffness for the relevant d o f of the node e A beam should not be given hinges with no or very small resistance in both ends in such a way that a rigid body motion of the beam is allowed This will be the case if the same translational d o f in both ends are defined as hinges and likewise for the rotational d o f about the element axis A similar errone ous situation may occur for a straight line of several beams being fully connected to each other but where other beams are hinged to this line of beams the line of beams may for instance be free to rotate about its axis When combining a hinge with an eccentricity note that the hinge will in effect be at the node rather than at the beam end see Figure 3 8 beam end a eccentricity rotational hinge A Figure 3 8 Illustration of hinges for a two node beam element with eccentricity
255. re generated for elements for which local coordinate systems have not explicitly been defined The orientation of the default local coordinate system is described for the PROPERTY LOCAL COORDINATE command See Section 2 5 on the necessity of optimising the node numbering PARAMETERS sup el n superelement number BANDWIDTH OPTIMIZATION The node numbering is optimised with respect to the bandwidth of the stiffness matrix NO OPTIMIZATION The node numbering is not optimised PROFILE OPTIMIZATION The node numbering is optimised with respect to the profile of the stiffness matrix END CUT DATA Write end cut data to separate file for use in the Installjac launch program GENSOD SPLICE TEMPLATE Writes the input files templates to be used by Gensod GEN SOD INP and Splice SPLICE INP SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 245 NOTES Giving the command WRITE sup el no involves no optimisation of the node numbering see Section 2 5 on the consequence of this Preframe SESAM 5 246 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 WRITE GENSOD SPLICE TEMPLATE WRITE GENSOD SPLICE TEMPLATE _ soil id numvec_ topsup PURPOSE The command writes the input files templates to be used by Gensod GENSOD INP and Splice SPLICE INP PARAMETERS soil id The soil profile id number to be used Currently only id 1 allowed numvec Number of load vectors to be analysed by Splice default number of basic load c
256. reframe Preframe SESAM 5 74 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 GENERATE JACKET K BRACING LINE GENERATE eltyp PILE PILE FROM SOIL T BRACING X BRACING PURPOSE The GENERATE command creates several nodes and elements by a single command The command substi tutes repeated use of the NODE and ELEMENT commands To create a jacket model for example use the GENERATE BEAM JACKET command followed by other GENERATE commands to refine the model Options are available for creating nodes and elements for JACKET command creates all legs and the main bracings of a complete four six or eight legged jacket model this model may then be refined The BEAM BEAS type of element is normally the only relevant choice for eltyp the command will optionally also create NONSTRUCTURAL BEAM BEAS N elements see below K BRACING command creates a K bracing by splitting an existing element into two new elements and inserting elements between the new node and two other nodes LINE command creates a line of nodes and elements between two existing nodes PILE command generates one or several piles pile concepts based on selection of node s or one pile based on a specific node and element PILE FROM SOIL command generates one or several piles pile concepts based on the soil profile id given T BRACING command creates a T bracing by projecting an existing node onto an existin
257. rface File containing a previously estab lished model first level superelement re numbers changes the number of previously defined nodes elements load cases materials and cross sections rotates the display of the model sets and defines various control parameters this command should not be confused with sets of nodes and elements defined by the DEFINE SET command splits beam elements Single elements may be split into any number of new elements Elements connected to a common node may be split at given distances from the node this feature is aimed at introducing cans and stubs for tubular joints defines a transformation from the model s global coordinate system The transformation is used to describe transformed boundary conditions It can also be used during input of for in stance load data the load data then refers to the transformed co ordinate system rather than to the model s coordinate system writes an Input Interface File containing the model first level superelement See Section 2 5 on this The command is also used for producing templates for input to the programs Gensod and Splice increases or decreases the scale of the display reads commands from a command input file defined by the SET COMMAND INPUT FILE command Preframe SESAM 2 6 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 DELETE deletes data EXIT exits from Preframe The model and log files are saved and closed 2 5 Transfer of the Model thro
258. ross section toa CHANNEL cross section With the exception that the cross section type is not requested the command is equal to the command for defining materials PROP ERTY SECTION see this SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 29 CHANGE CAN CHORD node _ element CAN dy thk sfy sfz length JOINT node or if the SET ASSIGN OPTION SECTION NUMBER is switched ON CHORD node _ element CAN secno length JOINT node PURPOSE The command changes a can section either one of the incoming chords chord aligned or to both chords entering the joint See Section 3 6 1 regarding the ASSIGN OPTION switch PARAMETERS CHORD Assign to selected part of joint chord or aligned chord JOINT Assign to both chord and aligned chord in joint node Node for start of can section element Element to modify dy Pipe outer diameter default element to split thk Thickness of pipe wall default element to split sfy Pipe section shear area modifying factor local y axis sfz Pipe section shear area modifying factor local z axis length Can length secno Section number to be used as can strengthening NOTES For the JOINT option the pipe section parameters must be given twice chord aligned The default can length is calculated according to given parameters see command SET CAN STUB LENGTH PARAME TERS and joint geometry If the pipe section parameters
259. rs The DELETE NODE command deletes selected nodes Elements connected to the deleted nodes will also be deleted Loads defined for the explicitly deleted nodes and the implicitly deleted elements will also be deleted The DELETE PILE CONCEPT command deletes nodes and elements used in pile concepts The DELETE SECTION command deletes cross sections However if a cross section is referred to by an element the program will refuse to delete the cross section The DELETE SET command deletes a named SET The DELETE SOIL command deletes SOIL DATA DISPLAY TYPE The DELETE TRANSFORMATION command deletes a transformation The DELETE UNCONNECTED NODES command deletes all nodes which are not connected to any ele ment Preframe SESAM 5 56 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 DELETE INITIAL CONDITION DISPLACEMENT INITIAL CONDITION VELOCITY select nodes BOTH PURPOSE The command deletes initial conditions of the nodes PARAMETERS DISPLACEMENT Displacement option of initial condition is deleted VELOCITY Velocity option of initial condition is deleted BOTH Both options of initial conditions are deleted select nodes Select nodes see Section 5 1 NOTES See also CHANGE INITIAL CONDITION INITIAL CONDITION PRINT NODE INITIAL CONDITION SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 57 DELETE LOAD LOAD load case YES select element
260. s cross sections of the elements i e the reference to a cross section number e material properties of the elements i e the reference to a material number e local coordinate systems of the elements in the case of copying a plane not when copying a line eccentricities offsets defined for the elements e hinges defined for the elements The following data are not copied e elements of type SPRING TO GROUND and DAMPER TO GROUND nodal masses boundary conditions e local coordinate systems of the elements in the case of copying a line e loads PARAMETERS source Two LINE option or three PLANE option nodes identifying the nodes and elements to be copied destination Two LINE option or three PLANE option nodes determin ing the position of the copy setname A previously defined set name Preframe SESAM 5 44 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 vector A vector determining the position of the copy of a set of nodes and elements from the source to the destination node number increment An increment to apply to all nodes of the destination compared to the source Care should be taken to avoid conflicting node numbers element number increment An increment to apply to all elements of the destination com pared to the source Care should be taken to avoid conflicting element numbers NOTES For the LINE option the source nodes and elements are selected by referring to the two end nodes of the line
261. s The load may be given for any boundary condition code FREE FIXED PRESCRIBED SUPER Nodal prescribed displacements or accelerations In effect loads are applied corresponding to the given displacements or accelerations To specify this kind of loading the boundary condition code PRESCRIBED must be defined for the appropriate nodes d o f s See the BOUNDARY command Element loads Element point load The given forces are applied at a point along the element defined by a given distance from end 1 of the element This can only be assigned to BEAM type elements Element distributed load The load is distributed along a part of the element The load intensity is given at two points along the element The points are defined by their distances from the two ends of the element The load varies linearly along the element between the two points Element line load The load is distributed along several element The load intensity is given at start and end of chain of elements Element temperature load Temperatures can be assigned to TRUSS and BEAM elements Two temperature load options are available e Same temperature for all the two nodes of the element e Different temperature for all the two nodes of the element Preframe SESAM 5 108 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 e Gravity load The acceleration of gravity is given the analysis program e g Sestra will compute the weight distribut
262. s ALL NO ELEMENT DISTRIBUTED select elements index POINT select elements index CONSTANT TEMPERAURE ACROSS THICKNESS select elements index GRAVITY YES select nodes ALL NO NODE FORCE select nodes index PRESCRIBED DISPLACEMENT select nodes index PRESCRIBED ACCELERATION select nodes index ROTATION OF STRUCTURE PURPOSE The command deletes loads See the LOAD command for a more detailed explanation of the load types The load index is used to distinguish between individual loads of the same type for the same node element for the same load case For example a nodal force defined for the second time for the same node for the same load case is given index 2 Note that the load index may change after deletion the load index always goes from 1 to N where N is the number of loads of the same type for that particular node element PARAMETERS load case Load case number ALL Delete all loads YES NO Confirm deletion select elements Select elements see Section 5 1 DISTRIBUTED Delete distributed element loads POINT Delete element point loads index Load index CONSTANT TEMPERATURE ACROSS THICKNESS Delete element temperature loads Preframe 5 58 GRAVITY select nodes FORCE PRESCRIBED ACCELERATION PRESCRIBED DISPLACEMENT ROTATION OF STRUCTURE 10 SEP 2004 SESAM Program version 6 9 Delete gravity loads Select nodes see Section 5 1 Delete nodal fo
263. s of the tubular sections For each section two shear factors also need to be given these are normally set to 1 0 o First create cross sections referred to in the GENERATE command PROPERTY SECTION 1 PIPE dl t1 1 0 1 0 2 PEPE d2t2 1 0 1 0 3 PIPE d3 t3 1 0 1 0 4 PIPE d4 t4 1 0 1 0 GENERATE BEAM JACKET 8 LEGGED Give the main dimensions 80 0 50 0 0 0 60 0 30 0 75 0 18 0 Give elevations Z values for horizontal bracings 5 0 26 0 48 0 70 0 END Specify X bracings in row 3 elevations 2 and 3 BRACINGS X BRACINGS 3 2 3 END And X bracings in transverse row elevation 1 TRANSVERSE ROW 1 END END Define conductors in X Y 11 4 and 11 2 CONDUCTORS 11 4 11 2 END NONSTRUCTURAL BEAM Assign section 1 to legs all elevations SECTIONS LEGS ALL ELEVATIONS 1 END Assign section 2 to horizontal bracings all elevations HORIZONTAL BRACINGS ALL ELEVATIONS 2 END Assign section 3 to X bracings all elevations X BRACINGS ALL ELEVATIONS 3 END Assign section 4 to conductors CONDUCTORS 4 END END END No SESAM Program version 6 9 Preframe 3 12 10 SEP 2004 z top elev 4 z elev 4 elev 3 z elev 3 elev 2 z elev 2 elev 1 z elev 1 z bot row 3 elevations 2 and 3 identifies these panels elevati
264. s with section 10 so that their tops flush with beams with sections 1 and 2 The eccentricity will in this case be 1 6 0 7 2 0 45 in global Z direction e Use the present button Facetted in middle column of commands and zoom in to verify sections and eccentricities Revert to wireframe display by clicking Wirefram The section numbers refer to the table below The system lines of the beams are drawn in their eccentric positions Box cross sections No hz by tt 16 10 0 04 16 08 0 04 10 10 0 05 10 08 0 035 10 1 0 0 035 0 8 0 8 0 025 15 10 0 04 15 08 0 04 I or H cross sections No hz bt tt 9 10 03 0 036 10 07 0 3 0 032 oNu DNUB UN Pipe cross section No dy t 11 1 5 0 04 ty 0 025 0 025 0 05 0 035 0 035 0 025 0 025 0 025 ty 0 019 0 017 Figure A 3 The cross sections of the module frame tb 0 04 0 04 0 05 0 035 0 035 0 025 0 04 0 04 bb 0 3 0 3 tb 0 036 0 032 hz SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 A 5 The cellar deck is complete Now model the main deck e Define a set named LOWER containing all nodes and elements created so far e Copy this set to create the main deck give node and element number increments 1000 Beams with box sections land 2 in the cellar deck correspond to beams with box sections 7 and 8 in the main deck see Figure A 3 Overrule previous section assignments with new ones by using the PROP ERTY CONNECT
265. same load case For example a nodal force defined for the second time for the same node for the same load case is given index 2 When changing the load for a single node element the original values will be used as default values When changing the load for several nodes elements Preframe will propose default values corresponding to the load for the node element with the smallest internal element number The loads for all selected nodes elements are then changed according to the new load values Complex loads may be changed to real loads and vice versa Preframe SESAM 5 36 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 CHANGE LOAD load case TO MASSES gravity load case select nodes NODE LOAD load case TO MASSES ELEMENT DISTRIBUTED gravity load case LOAD select elements ELEMENT POINT LOAD PURPOSE The command changes static real nodal forces and element loads to nodal masses This is done by dividing the previously given force s of load case load case by the acceleration of gravity previously defined as part of load case gravity load case This mass is added to any previously defined masses for the translational components of the mass matrix mtx mty mtz the rotational components and off diagonal terms will not be added any values any previously defined rotational mass component will be maintained mt mt mt f g mr mry mr 0 PARAMETERS NODE LOAD Convert node loads equal to selecting
266. se 3 Figure 3 9 Changing a node position with aligned elements Several inter linked alignments e g jacket legs combined with X bracings should be avoided Further note that alignments combined with eccentricities should be avoided as the existence of any eccentricities is neglected in the alignment calculations 3 5 Members Member concepts segmented members are able to hold information about several elements on a straight line between two nodes structural joints Special commands are used to quickly define can stub and coni cal member segments in the model The member concept is also used to hold non geometric information i e hydrodynamic properties and sta bility parameters Figure 3 10 Create a member by merging elements The member definition contains the following information Preframe SESAM 3 20 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 Element numbers between the two end nodes and in which order e Information regarding elements representing can stub and conical member segments e Reference to hydrodynamic properties Cd Cm flooding status assigned to the member e Reference to stability parameters buckling length effective length factor assigned to the member The command CREATE MEMBER and CREATE MEMBER FROM ELEMENTS are used to create mem bers A member is a modelling concept defined by a start and an end node joints and one or more elements segments between the two nodes All elements belonging to a m
267. section B 1 6 2 Sectional Parameters Computed The expressions below for LX IY IZ WXMIN WYMIN WZMIN SHARY SHARZ and SHCENY are taken from Ref 1 The expression for SHCENZ is taken from Ref 2 B1 7 Pipe section B 1 7 1 Sectional Dimensions DY Outer diameter T Thickness of wall SFY Shear factor y direction SFZ Shear factor z direction Preframe SESAM B 8 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 DY Figure B 7 Pipe section B 1 7 2 Sectional Parameters Computed The expressions below for LX IY IZ WXMIN WYMIN WZMIN SHARY SHARZ SHCENY and SHCENZ are taken from Ref 1 B1 8 Un symmetrical I section B 1 8 1 Sectional Dimensions HZ Height BT Width of top flange BTA B1 in Figure 5 29 Width of part of top flange along positive y axis TT Thickness of top flange TY Thickness of web BB Width of bottom flange BBA B2 in Figure 5 29 Width of part of bottom flange along positive y axis TB Thickness of bottom flange SFY Shear factor y direction SFZ Shear factor z direction SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 B 9 Figure B 8 Un symmetrical I section B 1 8 2 Sectional Parameters Computed The expressions below for LX IY IZ WXMIN WYMIN WZMIN SHARY and SHARZ are taken from Ref 1 The expressions for SHCENY and SHCENZ are taken from Ref 3 B2 Units A SESAM analysis is based on a set of consistent units The units to use must be determined before com mencing t
268. see Section A 1 2 Modelling a small 4 legged jacket with soil and pile see Section A 2 Note that Section 3 2 4 provides details on how to model an 8 legged jacket with conductors using the GEN ERATE command Section A 3 illustrates the effect of the CHANGE JOINT sel nodes GAP PLANEWISE command A1 Modelling a Module Frame This example illustrates most basic modelling techniques of Preframe The model to create is illustrated in Figure A 1 The following consistent set of units are used KiloNewton KN meter second and tonne The main dimensions are defined in Figure A 2 The cross sectional data are defined in Figure A 3 The material is steel with data E 2 1E8 v 0 3 and p 7 85 The loads are shown in Figure A 4 The module is fixed by spring to ground elements connected to the bottom of the four tubular support elements Hints for how to create the model using the graphical user interface as described in Section 3 1 are given below You may therefore use this example as a tutorial in interactive use of Preframe While the hints refer mostly to line mode commands you may in this tutorial find it more convenient to use the equivalent graph ical user interface actions The line mode commands for creating the complete model are given at the end of the section Note that the command log file from an interactive session will more or less be equal to the given line mode commands If you don t bother giving a systematic node and
269. segment The destination line segment is defined by referring to nodes that already exist Compared with the source the destination may be contracted or extended The distances between the nodes along the lines will be kept in proportion For the PLANE option the source nodes and elements are selected by referring to three nodes within the plane The destination plane is defined by referring to nodes that already exist Scaling of the source plane is not allowed the two triangles defined by the two sets of nodes must be congruent Local coordinate sys tems and eccentricities are rotated in the same way as the nodes when copying a plane For the SET option the whole set referred to by name is copied to a destination identified by a vector from the source to the destination The copy command will not copy a node or an element to the same position as an existing node or element SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 45 CREATE MEMBER CREATE sub commands MEMBER FROM ELEMENT PURPOSE The command creates members A member is a modelling concept defined by a start and an end node joints and one or more elements segments between the two nodes Can and stub sections can only be the start or end segment of a member hence members shall normally be defined between two structural joints The member information is read and used by FRAMEWORK Reminder FRAMEWORK is capable of handling joint related data e g perform
270. splay is made the LABEL command may then be re entered The size of the symbols may be adjusted by the SET GRAPHICS SIZE SYMBOLS command The symbols used are shown in Figure 5 12 PARAMETERS BOUNDARY CONDITION SYMBOL Add symbols showing fixed d o f s see Figure 5 12 CONCEPT ATTRIBUTES Add concept attributes see following sub command ELEMENT NUMBERS Add element numbers do not use together with labelling of ma terial numbers and section numbers as they will superimpose each other LOCAL COORDINATE Add either the elements local y or z axes both may be added by entering both commands LOCAL Y AXIS Add either the elements local y or z axes both may be added by entering both commands SESAM Program version 6 9 LOCAL Z AXIS MATERIAL NUMBERS MEMBER NAMES NODE NUMBERS EXTERNAL NODE NUMBER INTERNAL NODE NUMBER NODE SYMBOLS ALL NODES SUPER NODE ONLY ORIGIN SYMBOL PILE NAME SECTION NUMBER SOIL DATA NOTES See also SET GRAPHICS SIZE SYMBOLS Preframe 10 SEP 2004 5 97 Add either the elements local y or z axes both may be added by entering both commands Add material numbers do not use together with labelling of el ement numbers and section numbers as they will superimpose each other Add member names Add the user defined external or program assigned internal node numbers Normally the user is only interested in the ex ternal node number Add the user defined external
271. t drawn at global co ordinates X 0 0 Y 0 0 This may however be changed by the command SET SOIL PROFILE X Y See also SET SOIL PROFILE X Y SET GRAPHICS PRESENTATION LOAD EXAMPLES ADD DISPLAY LOAD 10 NODE FORCE ADD DISPLAY SOIL PROFILE 1 Preframe SESAM 5 8 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 ALIGN elem ALIGNED WITH elem2 ALIGN LINE nodel node2 PURPOSE The command specifies that elements shall be aligned so that changes to the position of either of the two extreme nodes will result in the common node moving to a new position to maintain the alignment or estab lish alignment if not aligned prior to giving the command See Section 3 4 PARAMETERS eleml Align elements elem1 and elem2 elem2 LINE Add alignment attribute to all elements on the straight line between nodel and node2 nodel Start node for alignment node2 End node for alignment NOTES If the node in one end of aligned elements moves all intermediate nodes will be moved to keep the elements in a straight line Also if the first or last element is updated with eccentricity information all intermediate elements will be applied with necessary eccentricities to keep elements in a straight line The centre node in an X brace will move when gap calculations adding brace eccentricities are performed at the structural joints Hence if eccentricities are deleted by the command DELETE ECCENTRICITY an
272. t and should be disregarded PARAMETERS trano Transformation reference number SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 163 PROPERTY PROPERTY CONNECT ECCENTRICITY GAP HINGE LOCAL COORDINATE MATERIAL SECTION SOIL PURPOSE The command defines properties There are six types of properties eccentricities or offsets defined explicitly by the PROPERTY ECCENTRICITY command or implicitly computed by the program by the PROPERTY GAP command hinged connection of elements to nodes local coordinate systems of elements geometrical cross sectional data material data soil data Cross sections and material data are first defined and given reference numbers and subsequently assigned to the elements by the PROPERTY CONNECT command The other properties are defined directly for the relevant elements Preframe SESAM 5 164 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 PROPERTY CONNECT SECTION sctno CONNECT select elements MATERIAL matno PURPOSE The command connects or assigns cross sections and materials to elements The PROPERTY CONNECT command may be repeated to override a previous assignment for an element PARAMETERS SECTION A cross section is to be connected sctno Number of the cross section to be connected MATERIAL A material is to be connected matno Number of the material to be connected select elements Select elements see Secti
273. t from an existing node extrapolated from or interpolated between two existing nodes and at the intersection between two lines Furthermore several nodes may be created along a line and a group of nodes may be created It is also possible to copy a set of existing nodes to a new position A model will always have a cartesian coordinate system to which all data refer Some data e g loads and boundary conditions may be input in a transformed coordinate system but the data will always be converted to the model s cartesian coordinate system The model s coordinate system is referred to as the global coor dinate system Elements are either created one by one between existing nodes along a line of existing nodes or a group of elements may be created As for the nodes existing elements may be copied to new positions Yet a way of creating nodes and elements is offered by the command GENERATE This involves creating both nodes and elements in one operation The command is highly efficient for jacket modelling in which the main structural components of 4 6 and 8 legged jackets may be created by a single command Further more a line of nodes and elements may be generated rather than creating a line of nodes first and thereafter a line of elements and various bracing K T and X configurations may be inserted in a model The GENERATE command is also used for creating piles The piles are modelled by ordinary nodes and beam elements However e
274. t of rounded corners are not taken into account when calculating the sectional properties the torsional moment of inertia Note that the cross sections should be used with care The dimensions of a cross section should not be given so that the specified cross section degenerates into another type The formulae used to calculate the cross sectional properties are based on the assumption that the cross sections have a reasonable shape For all SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 181 standard cross section types the formulae are sufficiently correct However a study has shown that the for mulae for the torsional moments of inertia are most sensitive to misuse of the cross sections The shear cen tre location z component for the un symmetrical I and L sections and the shear area in the direction of y axis for the I and un symmetrical I sections are also sensitive to misuse of the cross sections Appendix B 1 describes in detail how the moments of inertia shear areas shear centres etc are calculated Preframe SESAM 5 182 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 PROPERTY SECTION sctno BAR sctno BAR hz bb bt sfy sfz PURPOSE The command defines a bar cross section PARAMETERS sctn Section reference number hz Height bb Width at bottom bt Width at top sfy sfz Factors modifying the shear areas calculated by the program The modified shear areas are see the PRINT SECTION command for an ex
275. ted to end 1 of the original element see NOTES below on how to determine which end is end 1 Therefore two new element numbers are required and one new node number PARAMETERS node Node to project onto an element element Element onto which the node is projected nodeno Node number of the created node AUTO Node element numbers will be generated automatically automatically generated node number will be the highest current node number plus 1 two automatically generated element numbers will be element incremented by 1 and 2 If these num bers are occupied by other elements then the element numbers will be the highest current element number plus 1 and 2 elno 2 Element numbers of the created elements Both elements are manually given a number STEP Element numbers will be generated step wise first element Element number of first created element element step The step in element numbering NOTES Possible loads defined for the element being split are deleted You may find it convenient to display a panel of the model DISPLAY ELEMENT PLANE and then posi tion the T bracing by clicking the appropriate nodes and element The SET DEFAULT SECTION command may be used to pre select the appropriate section for the T bracings Note that only the T bracing will be SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 91 assigned this default section the two elements replacing the split element will inherit the section of the orig inal elem
276. ted to the nodes Preframe 5 147 Preframe SESAM 5 148 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 PRINT NODE BOUNDARY CONDITIONS BOUNDARY CONDITIONS select nodes PURPOSE The command prints a table of the boundary conditions of the nodes The table has the following appear ance SUPER ELEMENT TYPE 1 LEVEL l EXT INT TRANSF BOUNDARY CONDITIONS NO NO NO TX TY TZ RX RY RZ 104 22 SUPERL SUPERL SUPERL 304 26 PRESC PRESC PRESC PRESC 405 T2 888 FIXED FIXED 701 3 LINEAR LINEAR LINEAR LINEAR LINEAR LINEAR 703 19 SUPER SUPER SUPER X X X 705 4 LINEAR LINEAR 708 23 SUPER SUPER SUPER The columns of the table give from left to right user defined external node number internal node number initially the first node created is number 1 the last is N where N is the number of nodes optimising the node numbering will change this this number is normally of no interest to the user e transformation reference number the boundary conditions of the node relate to the transformed coordi nate system instead of the global coordinate system boundary condition codes for the six d o f s It is possible to switch between text and digits for boundary condition codes by the SET PRINT TABLE NODE BOUNDARY TABLE command The possible boundary condition codes are digit text boundary condition of d o f 1 X does not exist the node has reduce
277. terface selection of both elements and nodes 1s available by click ing the mouse For example give the command DISPLAY JOINT and click the mouse at the free end of SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 3 33 one of the elements to display the neighbouring joint Or click at the joint itself within the DISPLAY FOOTPRINT command The LABEL command cannot be used for a display of a joint The commands ROTATE SET GRAPHICS and ZOOM are allowed The remarks below for the DISPLAY FOOTPRINT command on how the chord is determined and as sumed to be continuous through the node and that the chord brace intersections are between the outer sur faces are valid also for the DISPLAY JOINT command FOOTPRINT displays the footprint of a joint i e a developed view of a part of the chord with the brace intersections shown see Figure 3 20 The quadrilateral formed by the horizontal broken lines and the vertical solid lines is the developed chord The element numbers of the braces are given in the middle of the intersection curves The gaps between the intersections will also be displayed with their current values The gaps are only shown when they are larger than the zero gap see SET ZERO GAP and smaller than the display gap see SET DISPLAY GAP Yellow colour is used for gaps larger than the legal gap see SET LE GAL GAP and red for gaps less than the legal gap Overlaps are treated in the same way as zero gaps
278. the command contains the READ command execution of the command input file will be aborted after executing the READ command Preframe SESAM 5 208 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 SET DEFAULT matno MATERIAL NONE DEFAULT sctno SECTION NONE PURPOSE The command defines material and or section numbers to be automatically assigned connected to elements subsequently created The command may conveniently be used as follows Prior to creating a number of elements having the same section and or material define the appropriate section as default Then switch to a new default section prior to creating several new elements having another section This command spares you from assigning con necting the various sections afterwards The assignments may be overwritten by explicit assignments PROPERTY CONNECT afterwards PARAMETERS matno Material reference number sctno Section reference number NONE No material section numbers will be assigned This is the default condition for both section and material SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 209 SET ELEMENT LOAD DISTANCE MODE PROJECTION OF NODES ON ELEMENT AXIS END OF FLEXIBLE PART OF ELEMENT ELEMENT LOAD DISTANCE MODE PURPOSE The command decides whether the extent of distributed element loads are relative to the points where the nodes are projected onto the element axis or from the ends of the flexible part of t
279. the centroid centre of gravity not including and including nodal masses mass moment of inertia about the centroid mass moment of inertia about the origin mass sum not including nodal masses and finally mass sum for nodal masses This calculation only takes into account beam truss and non structural beam elements for which materials and cross sections are given only the flexible part of the elements contribute in the calculation The formulae for calculating the centroid and the mass moment of inertia assume that the mass of the elements is distributed evenly along the element axis i e the shape of the cross sections are not taken into account The table has the following appearance MODEL FILE PREFRAME1 MOD LOG FILE PREFRAME1 JNL SUPER ELEMENT TYPE 1 COORDINATE TOLERANCE 0 1000 ANGLE TOLERANCE 0 0010 UNIT VECTOR TOLERANCE 0 0010 ELEMENTS TOTAL 131 BEA BEAS 106 TRUSS TESS 12 SPRING TO GROUND GSPR 2 OTHER 11 NODES TOTAL 52 FIXED 1 PRESCRIBED DISPL 3 LINEAR DEPENDENT 3 SUPER 8 SECTIONS 7 MATERIALS 7 LOAD CASES TOTAL 4 INERTIA 2 NODE 2 ELEMENT 3 CENTROID OF STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS X Y Z 0 4593 0 0415 56 3558 ASS MOMENT OF INERTIA OF STR EL ABOUT CENTROID X Y Z 0 9350627E 12 0 9377428E 12 0 314549
280. the node in more detail The view may be zoomed and manipulated by the ROTATE command and SET GRAPHICS command The LABEL command annotates the view The NODE option causes the selected nodes to be displayed as yellow diamonds plus the elements having all their nodes among the selected nodes The view may be zoomed and manipulated by the ROTATE com mand and SET GRAPHICS command The LABEL command annotates the view PARAMETERS select elements Select elements see Section 5 1 select nodes Select nodes see Section 5 1 nodeno Selected node to be displayed ALL Display all types occurrences Preframe 5 62 BY ELEMENT BY NAME CONDUCTOR MAIN PILE GROUP NOTES SESAM 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 Display member pile containing at least one of the selected elements Select el ements by use of standard select element options Display members pile according to specified names NO to end name list Display piles defined as conductor piles only Display piles defined as main piles only Display piles defined as group of piles only In silhouette and facetted display mode beam elements with GENERAL profile are displayed similar to BAR profiles but with dashed lines The profile height used is h 2 0 1 Wymin The profile width used is b 2 0 L W zmin SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 63 ELEMENT GROUP LINE nodel node2 ELEMENT eltyp elno nodel node2
281. they are inter preted as true spacings and the remaining part of the line will be divided into equal parts 5 STEP 327 CTO 1 20 09 058 01 Des See Figure 5 16 the new nodes 21 through 51 are created along the line between the previously created two nodes 11 and 61 There are 5 divisions for which relative spacings are given SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 125 de Figure 5 16 Creating a NODE LINE Preframe SESAM 5 126 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 NODE RELATIVE RELATIVE refnode dx dy dz nodeno PURPOSE The command creates a node positioned relative by offset to an existing node PARAMETERS refnode Reference node from which the new node is set off dx dy dz Offset given in the global coordinates of the model nodeno Number of the node to create EXAMPLES NODE RELATIVE 21 5 0 1 23 Figure 5 17 Creating a node by NODE RELATIVE SESAM Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 NODE single nodeno x y z PURPOSE The command creates a new single node PARAMETERS nodeno Node number of the new node xyz Cartesian coordinates of the node Preframe 5 127 Preframe SESAM 5 128 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 PLOT AS LAST DISPLAY YES YES SUPER NODES ONLY PLOT ALL Sas E ALL NODES NO NO NONE NONE EXTERNAL N
282. tia 3 29 3 10 1 Change Nodal Coordinates cccccccccsccesscessessseeeeeseceecseeeeececseecsaenecseeeeseesseecessaeenseenses 3 29 3 10 2 Change Load to Mass cti adas 3 29 COPY Data rotar vee EA E it AA ELA RARE AR a 3 30 Linear Dependency na n a a a a EE EERE odes esas ii naa 3 30 Noda Mis a o aS 3 31 DARD OINO OY LTO ARENAER EET E E EEE E E AA anbetbavedetencesteatenteandeteatiausdageans 3 31 DO BEEE AA iia 3 32 Display Feature Siera e e a EE EE EEE EEE EE TE E E E E teenie 3 32 Panta Datare pe an aa a a a id a A a ana N a haten ia 3 40 Writing input templates to soil stiffness and pile soil analysES oooococonncnnnnnnnnnnoncneincnnncnncnnos 3 40 Writing end cut data for the jacket installation program sssseseesssesssseesessssesssesessssesessesesesseses 3 40 Writing and Reading Input Interface File 0 0 0 cece cecceeseeessesteceseceeceeeeeeeeeseecssenseeseeeeseeesaeeeeeaeenes 3 40 EXECUTION OF PREERA VIE scsssasssssasheseissecssessevosvnasiscnetedoasasecevaootndsvenstvssusosnnbedeansns 4 1 Program Environment 2es25 255 A adn 4 1 4 1 1 Starting Preframe from Manager c cccceccccsscsssceseceseeeeeececeececeeeseeeeseecseeeseeeeeeseeeseeesees 4 1 4 1 2 Reading a Command Input File into PrefraM6 oooonncnncinncnonnconnnonnnannon cono nocononnnonancancconnnns 4 2 4 1 3 Starting Preframe as an Individual Program on UniX cocococcnicnncnncnnnnnnnnconcnncnncnnnncnncnncnnnnns 4 3 4 1 4 Line Mode Input of Commands and Arguments
283. tions PARAMETERS oldnumber Number to be changed newnumber The new number SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 201 ROTATE X AXIS ROTATE Y AXIS _ degrees Z AXIS PURPOSE The command rotates the picture displayed with the DISPLAY command or plotted with the PLOT com mand The rotations are about the global axis The rotations are accumulative and will be used for all subsequent DISPLAY and PLOT commands PARAMETERS degrees Angle in degrees Preframe SESAM 5 202 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 SET ALIGNMENT AUTOMATIC ANGLE TOLERANCE angtol ASSIGN OPTION COMMAND INPUT FILE COORDINATE TOLERANCE cotol DEFAULT DISPLAY GAP display gap value ELEMENT LOAD DISTANCE MODE GRAPHICS JOURNALLING LEGAL GAP legal gap value MODEL FILE NUMBERING AUTOMATIC PLOT PRINT SOIL PROFILE X Y CAN STUB LENGTH PARAMETER UNIT VECTOR TOLERANCE WRITE MODE ZERO GAP zero gap value SET PURPOSE The command sets different parameters for controlling the execution of the other commands Some of the options are explained below some are treated in more detail in the following The ANGLE TOLERANCE option specifies the angle tolerance used for determining whether an angle is 90 degrees or not The angle tolerance is given in degrees and the default value is 1 1000 The COORDINATE TOLERANCE option specifies the coo
284. to joints nodes The brace ends are moved in the chord x axis direction away from the node to ensure a proper gap between the brace chord intersections Brace ends are moved only when the gap is less than a minimum value see SET LEGAL GAP The calculation starts by moving the brace closest to the fixed brace see below then fixing that brace and moving the next brace and so on Note that the chord actually consists of two aligned beam elements the one with the largest diameter is termed chord and the other is termed aligned If their diameters are equal which often is the case the lowest element number is the chord The PROPERTY GAP command has the following appearance PROPERTY GAP node chord el aligned el legal gap FIXED BRACE element no IGNORE BRACE element no element no SYMMETRIC ELEMENTS element no element no FIXED BRACE element no GAP element no element no legal gap END If an eccentricity has been specified for a brace prior to giving the PROPERTY GAP command the eccen tricity will be maintained unless the gap is less than the minimum value Le if the gap is larger than the min imum value the eccentricity previously specified will not be changed See the warning in Section 3 3 1 about introducing eccentricities for an element for which a local coordinate system has already been defined the PROPERTY GAP command introduces eccentricities PROPERTY GAP in gr
285. to the user e the initial conditions the first line for each node gives the initial condition of the translational d o f s while the second line gives the initial condition for the rotational d o f s e type of initial condition displacement or velocity The format of the print of the initial conditions may be changed by the SET PRINT FORMAT command PARAMETERS select nodes Select nodes see Section 5 1 Preframe SESAM 5 152 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 PRINT NODE LINEAR DEPENDENCY LINEAR DEPENDENCY select nodes PURPOSE The command prints a table of the linear dependency factors of nodes for which such are defined The table has the following appearance SUPER ELEMENT TYPE 1 LEVEL 1 LIN DEP INDEP DEPENDENT D O F NODE NODE TX EY TZ RX RY RZ TZ 0 300 RX 0 300 RZ 0 300 TZ 0 440 1 500 RX 0 550 105 TX 0 600 The columns of the table give from left to right e user defined external node number of the linearly dependent node e user defined external node number of the independent node e the linear dependency factors organised in a matrix where each column represent the dependency of a linearly dependent d o f of the independent d o f s In the example above node 701 is linearly dependent of node 704 only while node 705 is linearly dependent of the two nodes 104 and 105 PARAMETERS select nodes Select nodes see Section 5 1
286. tub cabe veces elos EEA 5 194 PROPERTY SECTION somo UNS Y M Diococoonnocccononocccconanccononcncnnnananonnanoconnnnnnronnnnnronnnnnronananonnna 5 195 PROPERTY SOLE anta cita cbs tabs tl dida co tda 5 197 RE SDISPEA a A A AO al E Ati iii 5 198 O EEA OANA ORE ive Soba ive 5 199 RENUMBER sona elo eoea 5 200 ROTATE e de de 5 201 SETALIGNMENT AUTOMATIG tocante besa cd A 5 204 SET ASSIGN OP TIO Nic e a Due I a cee ee a 5 205 SET CAN STUB LENGTH PARAMETER ccccccsesssssscsscsseeseeseeseceseesecseseeeeseeseseeseeseeseeeseeaeenes 5 206 SET GOMMANDINPUEIEE a aia SO 5 207 SETDEFA UE E ot A td orita 5 208 SET ELEMENT LOAD DISTANCE MODE cocooooccnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnoss 5 209 SET GRAPHO S a iia 5 211 SET GRAPHICS AUT OAA eL ae ea ee tide te 5 212 SET GRAPHICS CHARACTER TYPE cccccccssessssssesscesceseeseeseesecesesecseceeseesesecsecseeseeseeeseeasenes 5 213 SET GRAPHICS COLOUR comisarios 5 214 SET GRAPHICS DEVICE ccccecccsscsssssessseseesecsseeseeseesecneceaeeseesesseceseesecsececsesesecaecseeeeseeseasesaenes 5 215 SET GRAPHICS EYE DIRECTION 00 ccceccesccssessesssescecseeseeseeseeeecesecsecsesseseeseaeeseeseeeeeeesessaes 5 216 SET GRAPHICS HIDDEN a a ts 5 217 SET GRAPHICS INPUT tl aras 5 218 SET GRAPHICS PLOLTFITME do ee ade o re bo 5 219 SET GRAPHICS PRESENTATION cerent non n cnn E non ron ei rra ninos 5 220 SET GRAPHICS SHRINK FACTOR coooocccccconconocnnoononnnonnonncononnnonnnnncn nono cnn n
287. ugh the Input Interface File As is the case for all SESAM preprocessors the model created by Preframe is transferred to the hydrody namic and or structural analysis programs via the Input Interface File which forms a part of the SESAM Interface File system All information related to the member concepts are written to the SESAM Input Interface File and the information is read by WAJAC and FRAMEWORK The Input Interface File the T file is a sequential ASCII character file with 80 character long records The straightforward definition of the file enables external programs to be connected to the SESAM system with comparative ease One interface file will be created for each superelement The name of the file will be prefixT FEM where e prefix is an optional character string that may and may not include a directory specification the string is common for all superelements in a superelement model e T is a mandatory character identifying this as an Input Interface File a T file as opposed to a Loads Interface File L file which uses character L and a Results Interface File R file which uses character R e FP is the superelement number the identifier of the superelement e FEM is a mandatory file extension Normally the user may find it most convenient to leave the prefix void This is also the default condition An example of a name of an Input Interface File is ABCT5 FEM When using the superelement techni
288. uss element with no bending stiffness A linear elastic material must be defined and assigned con nected to the element The element also requires a cross sec tion but only the area of the cross section is relevant A local coordinate system is irrelevant NONSTRUCTURAL BEAM BEAS N Two node element not contributing with stiffness The element only requires a cross section if wave loads are to be computed by Wajac A material density is also required if the element shall contribute with mass to the structural anal ysis SESAM Program version 6 9 AXIAL SPRING AXIS AXIAL DAMPER AXDA SPRING TO GROUND GSPR DAMPER TO GROUND GDAM SHIM ELEMENT GLSH GENERAL SPRING GLSH PILE SOIL PILS 3 3 Properties 3 3 1 Eccentricity Preframe 10 SEP 2004 3 15 Two node axial spring element An axial spring material must be defined and assigned con nected to the element Two node axial damper element for dynamic analysis only An axial damper material must be defined and assigned con nected to the element One node spring element A spring to ground material must be defined prior to creating the element as the material is referred to when creating it One node damper element for dynamic analysis only A damper to ground material must be defined prior to creating the element as the material is referred to when creating 1t Special two node spring element with equal stiffness in two translational directions n
289. uted along parts of selected elements The load intensities are given at two points along the elements The points are defined by their distances from the two ends of the element The loads vary linearly along the elements between these two points The command SET ELEMENT LOAD DISTANCE MODE may be used to specify that the distances to the points where the load intensities are given are from the ends of the flexible part of the element relevant when eccentricities are defined rather than from the projection of the nodes onto the element axis the default PARAMETERS load case Load case number select elements Select elements see Section 5 1 trano Transformation reference number fxj fyj fzj Real components of the force intensity at a point of distance dj from end j ifxj 1 y ifzj The corresponding imaginary components pfxj pfyj pfzj The corresponding phase angle components in degrees The real components are treated as amplitudes dj Distance from end j NOTES Warning If the element load is defined in the local i e the element s coordinate system then do not change this coordinate system by the PROPERTY LOCAL COORDINATE command as such will not correspond ingly change the load If required use PROPERTY LOCAL COORDINATE prior to the load definition SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 111 The user may select between END IMAGINARY COMPLEX and PHASE COMPLEX for the first end only Preframe SESAM 5 112 10
290. v given must be equal to or less than z top if equal then the top horizontal bracing will be at the top of the legs Select type of bracing X bracings will be inserted for rows and elevations as specified by the subsequent data Row number in longitudinal direction for which bracing will be inserted for given elevations Bracing will be inserted for all longitudinal rows for given ele vations Bracing will be inserted for all rows in transverse as well as longitudinal directions for given elevations Bracing will be inserted for the transverse row for given eleva tions Elevation numbers for which bracing will be inserted Bracing will be inserted for all elevations Define vertical conductors according to the subsequent data X and Y coordinates in the model s cartesian coordinate sys tem of individually given conductors Specify a conductor grid by giving the X and Y coordinates of a corner xg and yg the number of conductors and spacing be tween them in the X and Y directions respectively nx xsp and ny ysp Let the conductors be represented by beam elements Let the conductors be represented by nodes only This alterna tive is relevant if the conductors are defined as a separate su perelement Let the conductors be represented by non structural beams SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 79 SECTIONS Assign section numbers to elements created CONDUCTORS HORIZONTAL BRACING
291. vel Delete PY TZ QZ codes Delete skin friction parameters Delete tip resistance parameters Define the Z level by selecting a node The node defining the Z level Define the z level by manually giving the z value The z value Delete all nodes and elements used to display the soil profile Delete a soil type Number of soil type to be deleted Use the command PRINT SOIL to see defined DATA and TYPES The soil profile will automatically be delete prior to writing the SESAM Interface File FEM SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 61 DISPLAY ELEMENT select elements FOOTPRINT nodeno ALL MEMBER BY ELEMENT BY NAME DISPLAY JOINT nodeno NODE select nodes ALL ALL CONDUCTOR BY ELEMENT PILE CONCEPT bo MAIN BY NAME PILE GROUP PURPOSE The command displays the model See Section 3 16 for examples of displays The ELEMENT option causes the selected elements to be displayed alone i e the nodes will not appear The view may be zoomed and manipulated by the ROTATE command and SET GRAPHICS command The LABEL command annotates the view The FOOTPRINT option displays the footprint of a joint i e a developed view of a part of the chord with the brace intersections shown The view cannot be zoomed or otherwise manipulated The MEMBER option displays the member concepts created The JOINT option displays a selected joint node with the elements coming into
292. warning about introducing eccentricities for an element for which a local coordinate system has pre viously been defined given for the command PROPERTY ECCENTRICITY SESAM Preframe Program version 6 9 10 SEP 2004 5 167 PROPERTY HINGE GLOBAL HINGE select elements LOCAL FIXATION CONNECTIVITY alpha 6 ci 2 INTERELEMENT ELASTIC SPRING STIFFNESS 6 INFINITY PURPOSE The command introduces hinges involving d o f s of element ends to be released from the d o f s of the nodes Hinge data is given for the two beam nodes individually Also see Section 3 3 2 A hinge can be changed by the CHANGE HINGE command and deleted by the DELETE HINGE com mand For each d o f of the two element ends the user gives the coefficient of fixation connectivity 0 lt a lt 1 or alternatively the inter element elastic spring stiffness c gt 0 The hinge coefficients can either be specified in the GLOBAL coordinate system or in the LOCAL element coordinate system The relationship between c and a is a Cj ki cj where k is the diagonal term of the element stiffness matrix corresponding to d o f number i of the current node a 0 is fully released a 1 is fully connected no hinge PARAMETERS select elements Select elements see Section 5 1 GLOBAL The hinge coefficients refer to the global coordi nate system LOCAL The hinge coefficients refer to the
293. you close the PROPERTY GAP command by the END alternative Preframe SESAM 3 24 10 SEP 2004 Program version 6 9 If no braces are close to being perpendicular to the chord then the two braces closest to and on each side of the perpendicular plane are suggested as symmetric elements Either a fixed brace or two symmetric elements must be defined Selecting elements to be fixed braces or symmetric elements may also be done by clicking the mouse on the element numbers or the elements intersection curves within the screen display as indicated in Figure 3 12 There may be some braces which are to be left out of the current gap calculation i e not moved This may for instance be because they will be or has been taken care of in another PROPERTY GAP command Before defining the fixed brace s or symmetric elements the IGNORE BRACE subcommand should be used to eliminate these from the calculations A gap value different from the legal gap given in the beginning of the PROPERTY GAP command may be given for a pair of braces Use the GAP alternative followed by the relevant pair of element numbers to achieve this For example specifying a gap of 0 0 between a pair of braces allows these to overlap while other braces are moved to ensure proper gaps between this pair and other braces The PROPERTY GAP command is closed by the END alternative after having defined IGNORE BRACE FIXED BRACE and or SYM
294. ypes to the display Boundary Add boundary condition symbols to the display Direct access buttons These buttons are accessible at any time l e when you are in the middle of a command by clicking a command or a Shortcut command or by typing a line mode command you may rotate and zoom to get a better view The buttons and are logged with the default values they accept The button is logged as is The other buttons are not logged see Section 4 1 5 on logging commands The Direct access but tons are sorted in three groups as follows View Pan allows panning shifting the display Click the button then press and hold the LMB within the Graphic display area and a bounding box of the displayed model appears Move the mouse and release the LMB and the model will be displayed in its new position Rotate allows interactive rotation of the display Click the button then press and hold the LMB within the Graphic display area and a bounding box of the displayed model appears Move the mouse up and down to rotate the model about a screen horizontal axis and move left and right to rotate about a screen vertical axis A circular motion will rotate the model about an axis normal to the screen in the opposite direction of the circular motion When the LMB is released the model is displayed in its new position X axis Y axis and Z axis display the model as seen along the model s X Y and Z axis respectiv

Preframe

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents